WO2013129352A1 - Three-dimensional object detection device - Google Patents

Three-dimensional object detection device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2013129352A1
WO2013129352A1 PCT/JP2013/054853 JP2013054853W WO2013129352A1 WO 2013129352 A1 WO2013129352 A1 WO 2013129352A1 JP 2013054853 W JP2013054853 W JP 2013054853W WO 2013129352 A1 WO2013129352 A1 WO 2013129352A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
dimensional object
threshold value
light source
threshold
detection
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2013/054853
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
早川 泰久
修 深田
Original Assignee
日産自動車株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 日産自動車株式会社 filed Critical 日産自動車株式会社
Priority to RU2014139679A priority Critical patent/RU2633120C2/en
Priority to CN201380009569.8A priority patent/CN104115204B/en
Priority to JP2014502222A priority patent/JP5743020B2/en
Priority to BR112014020406-3A priority patent/BR112014020406B1/en
Priority to MX2014009700A priority patent/MX344875B/en
Priority to EP13754531.5A priority patent/EP2821981A4/en
Priority to US14/373,049 priority patent/US9830519B2/en
Publication of WO2013129352A1 publication Critical patent/WO2013129352A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G08SIGNALLING
    • G08GTRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
    • G08G1/00Traffic control systems for road vehicles
    • G08G1/16Anti-collision systems
    • G08G1/165Anti-collision systems for passive traffic, e.g. including static obstacles, trees
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06VIMAGE OR VIDEO RECOGNITION OR UNDERSTANDING
    • G06V20/00Scenes; Scene-specific elements
    • G06V20/50Context or environment of the image
    • G06V20/56Context or environment of the image exterior to a vehicle by using sensors mounted on the vehicle
    • G06V20/58Recognition of moving objects or obstacles, e.g. vehicles or pedestrians; Recognition of traffic objects, e.g. traffic signs, traffic lights or roads
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06VIMAGE OR VIDEO RECOGNITION OR UNDERSTANDING
    • G06V20/00Scenes; Scene-specific elements
    • G06V20/50Context or environment of the image
    • G06V20/56Context or environment of the image exterior to a vehicle by using sensors mounted on the vehicle
    • G06V20/58Recognition of moving objects or obstacles, e.g. vehicles or pedestrians; Recognition of traffic objects, e.g. traffic signs, traffic lights or roads
    • G06V20/584Recognition of moving objects or obstacles, e.g. vehicles or pedestrians; Recognition of traffic objects, e.g. traffic signs, traffic lights or roads of vehicle lights or traffic lights
    • GPHYSICS
    • G08SIGNALLING
    • G08GTRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
    • G08G1/00Traffic control systems for road vehicles
    • G08G1/16Anti-collision systems
    • GPHYSICS
    • G08SIGNALLING
    • G08GTRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
    • G08G1/00Traffic control systems for road vehicles
    • G08G1/16Anti-collision systems
    • G08G1/166Anti-collision systems for active traffic, e.g. moving vehicles, pedestrians, bikes
    • GPHYSICS
    • G08SIGNALLING
    • G08GTRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
    • G08G1/00Traffic control systems for road vehicles
    • G08G1/16Anti-collision systems
    • G08G1/167Driving aids for lane monitoring, lane changing, e.g. blind spot detection
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R2300/00Details of viewing arrangements using cameras and displays, specially adapted for use in a vehicle
    • B60R2300/60Details of viewing arrangements using cameras and displays, specially adapted for use in a vehicle characterised by monitoring and displaying vehicle exterior scenes from a transformed perspective
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R2300/00Details of viewing arrangements using cameras and displays, specially adapted for use in a vehicle
    • B60R2300/80Details of viewing arrangements using cameras and displays, specially adapted for use in a vehicle characterised by the intended use of the viewing arrangement
    • B60R2300/804Details of viewing arrangements using cameras and displays, specially adapted for use in a vehicle characterised by the intended use of the viewing arrangement for lane monitoring
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R2300/00Details of viewing arrangements using cameras and displays, specially adapted for use in a vehicle
    • B60R2300/80Details of viewing arrangements using cameras and displays, specially adapted for use in a vehicle characterised by the intended use of the viewing arrangement
    • B60R2300/8066Details of viewing arrangements using cameras and displays, specially adapted for use in a vehicle characterised by the intended use of the viewing arrangement for monitoring rearward traffic
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R2300/00Details of viewing arrangements using cameras and displays, specially adapted for use in a vehicle
    • B60R2300/80Details of viewing arrangements using cameras and displays, specially adapted for use in a vehicle characterised by the intended use of the viewing arrangement
    • B60R2300/8093Details of viewing arrangements using cameras and displays, specially adapted for use in a vehicle characterised by the intended use of the viewing arrangement for obstacle warning
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N7/00Television systems
    • H04N7/18Closed-circuit television [CCTV] systems, i.e. systems in which the video signal is not broadcast
    • H04N7/183Closed-circuit television [CCTV] systems, i.e. systems in which the video signal is not broadcast for receiving images from a single remote source

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a three-dimensional object detection device.
  • This application claims priority based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2012-045349 filed on Mar. 1, 2012.
  • the contents described in the application are incorporated into the present application by reference and made a part of the description of the present application.
  • Patent Literature a technique is known in which two captured images captured at different times are converted into a bird's-eye view image, and an obstacle is detected based on the difference between the two converted bird's-eye view images.
  • the lane adjacent to the adjacent lane (hereinafter also referred to as the adjacent adjacent lane)
  • the headlight light image may be erroneously detected as another vehicle traveling in the adjacent lane.
  • Headlight light is characterized by high brightness, so it is possible to identify the light of the headlight of a vehicle traveling in the adjacent lane according to the brightness, but the lens of the imaging device is dirty
  • the problem is that the light of the headlights of other vehicles traveling in the adjacent adjacent lane is diffusely reflected, and the brightness around the headlights increases, so that the adjacent vehicles located around the headlights cannot be detected properly. was there.
  • the problem to be solved by the present invention is to eliminate the influence of the headlight of another vehicle and detect the other vehicle traveling in the adjacent lane when detecting the other vehicle traveling in the adjacent lane adjacent to the lane in which the host vehicle is traveling. Is accurately detected.
  • the present invention detects a light source existing behind the host vehicle and detects a three-dimensional object existing in an adjacent lane so that a three-dimensional object is difficult to detect in a region ahead of the line connecting the detected light source and the imaging device.
  • the above-mentioned problem is solved by increasing the detection standard for doing so.
  • the present invention in the area in front of the headlight (light source), by increasing the detection standard of the adjacent vehicle, it is possible to effectively prevent erroneous detection of the adjacent vehicle around the headlight, and from the headlight (light source). Since the tire wheel of the adjacent lane existing behind can be detected appropriately, the adjacent vehicle traveling in the adjacent lane can be detected appropriately.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic configuration diagram of a vehicle equipped with the three-dimensional object detection device according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a plan view showing a traveling state of the vehicle of FIG.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing details of the computer according to the first embodiment.
  • FIGS. 4A and 4B are diagrams for explaining the outline of the processing of the alignment unit according to the first embodiment, in which FIG. 4A is a plan view showing the moving state of the vehicle, and FIG. 4B is an image showing the outline of alignment. It is.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram illustrating how a differential waveform is generated by the three-dimensional object detection unit according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a method of detecting an adjacent vehicle according to the first embodiment.
  • Figure 7 is a graph showing the brightness at the detected position of the detection area A1, A2, an example of a first relation between the threshold alpha 1.
  • Figure 8 is a diagram for explaining a rear distance from the camera, the first relationship between the threshold alpha 1.
  • FIG. 9A is a diagram illustrating a scene in which the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is irradiated on the region R2 in the detection regions A1 and A2.
  • FIG. 9B is a diagram illustrating a scene in which the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is irradiated on the region R1 in the detection regions A1 and A2.
  • FIG. 9A is a diagram illustrating a scene in which the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is irradiated on the region R1 in the detection regions A1 and A2.
  • FIG. 9C is a diagram illustrating a scene in which the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is irradiated on the region R3 in the detection regions A1 and A2.
  • FIG. 10 is a graph showing an example of a first threshold map showing the relationship between the brightness at the detection positions in the detection areas A1 and A2 and the threshold ⁇ 2 ′.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a second threshold map showing the relationship between the luminance at the detection positions in the detection areas A1 and A2 and the threshold ⁇ 2 ′′.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control map that defines the weight wt of the threshold value ⁇ 2 ′′ obtained from the second threshold map.
  • FIG. 10 is a graph showing an example of a first threshold map showing the relationship between the brightness at the detection positions in the detection areas A1 and A2 and the threshold ⁇ 2 ′.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a second threshold map showing the relationship between the luminance at the detection positions
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a method of adjusting the control map shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a small region divided by the three-dimensional object detection unit according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of a histogram obtained by the three-dimensional object detection unit according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating weighting by the three-dimensional object detection unit according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating another example of a histogram obtained by the three-dimensional object detection unit according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating the adjacent vehicle detection method according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the threshold value ⁇ setting process in step S105.
  • FIGS. 21A and 21B are diagrams illustrating the traveling state of the vehicle, in which FIG. 21A is a plan view illustrating the positional relationship of the detection region and the like, and FIG. 21B is a perspective view illustrating the positional relationship of the detection region and the like in real space.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the luminance difference calculation unit according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 22A is a diagram showing the positional relationship among the attention line, reference line, attention point, and reference point in the bird's-eye view image.
  • (B) is a figure which shows the positional relationship of the attention line, reference line, attention point, and reference point in real space.
  • FIG. 23A and 23B are diagrams for explaining the detailed operation of the luminance difference calculation unit according to the second embodiment, in which FIG. 23A is a diagram showing a detection area in a bird's-eye view image, and FIG. 23B is an attention in a bird's-eye view image. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of a line, a reference line, an attention point, and a reference point.
  • FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image for explaining the edge detection operation.
  • Figure 25 is a graph showing the brightness at the detected position of the detection area A1, A2, an example of a third relationship between the threshold value beta 1.
  • Figure 26 is a diagram for explaining a rear distance from the camera, a third relationship between the threshold value beta 1.
  • FIG. 23A is a diagram showing a detection area in a bird's-eye view image
  • FIG. 23B is an attention in a bird's-eye view image. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of a line, a
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of a third threshold map indicating the relationship between the luminance in the detection areas A1 and A2 and the threshold ⁇ 2 ′.
  • FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of a fourth threshold map showing the relationship between the luminance in the detection areas A1 and A2 and the threshold value ⁇ 2 ′′.
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control map defining the weight wt of the threshold value ⁇ 2 ′′ obtained from the fourth threshold map.
  • 30A and 30B are diagrams showing the edge line and the luminance distribution on the edge line, where FIG. 30A is a diagram showing the luminance distribution when a three-dimensional object (adjacent vehicle) is present in the detection area, and FIG. 30B is the detection area. It is a figure which shows luminance distribution when a solid object does not exist in FIG.
  • FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an adjacent vehicle detection method according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic configuration diagram of a vehicle equipped with a three-dimensional object detection device 1 according to the first embodiment.
  • the three-dimensional object detection device 1 according to the present embodiment is intended to detect a vehicle (hereinafter also referred to as an adjacent vehicle V2) that exists in an adjacent lane that may be contacted when the host vehicle V1 changes lanes. To do.
  • the three-dimensional object detection device 1 according to the present embodiment includes a camera 10, a vehicle speed sensor 20, and a calculator 30.
  • the camera 10 is attached to the vehicle V ⁇ b> 1 so that the optical axis is at an angle ⁇ downward from the horizontal at a position of the height h behind the host vehicle V ⁇ b> 1.
  • the camera 10 captures an image of a predetermined area in the surrounding environment of the host vehicle V1 from this position.
  • the vehicle speed sensor 20 detects the traveling speed of the host vehicle V1, and calculates the vehicle speed from the wheel speed detected by, for example, a wheel speed sensor that detects the rotational speed of the wheel.
  • the computer 30 detects an adjacent vehicle existing in an adjacent lane behind the host vehicle.
  • FIG. 2 is a plan view showing a traveling state of the host vehicle V1 of FIG.
  • the camera 10 images the vehicle rear side at a predetermined angle of view a.
  • the angle of view a of the camera 10 is set to an angle of view at which the left and right lanes (adjacent lanes) can be imaged in addition to the lane in which the host vehicle V1 travels.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing details of the computer 30 of FIG. In FIG. 3, the camera 10 and the vehicle speed sensor 20 are also illustrated in order to clarify the connection relationship.
  • the computer 30 includes a viewpoint conversion unit 31, a positioning unit 32, a three-dimensional object detection unit 33, a certainty factor determination unit 34, and a detection reference setting unit 35. Below, each structure is demonstrated.
  • the viewpoint conversion unit 31 inputs captured image data of a predetermined area obtained by imaging with the camera 10, and converts the viewpoint of the input captured image data into bird's-eye image data in a bird's-eye view state.
  • the state viewed from a bird's-eye view is a state viewed from the viewpoint of a virtual camera looking down from above, for example, vertically downward.
  • This viewpoint conversion can be executed as described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-219063.
  • the viewpoint conversion of captured image data to bird's-eye view image data is based on the principle that a vertical edge peculiar to a three-dimensional object is converted into a straight line group passing through a specific fixed point by viewpoint conversion to bird's-eye view image data. This is because a planar object and a three-dimensional object can be distinguished if used.
  • the alignment unit 32 sequentially inputs the bird's-eye view image data obtained by the viewpoint conversion of the viewpoint conversion unit 31 and aligns the positions of the inputted bird's-eye view image data at different times.
  • 4A and 4B are diagrams for explaining the outline of the processing of the alignment unit 32, where FIG. 4A is a plan view showing the moving state of the host vehicle V1, and FIG. 4B is an image showing the outline of the alignment.
  • the host vehicle V1 of the current time is located in P 1, one unit time before the vehicle V1 is located in the P 1 '. Further, there is a parallel running state with the vehicle V1 is located is adjacent vehicle V2 laterally after the vehicle V1, located in P 2 adjacent vehicle V2 is the current time, one unit time before the adjacent vehicle V2 is P 2 Suppose it is located at '. Furthermore, it is assumed that the host vehicle V1 has moved a distance d at one time. Note that “one hour before” may be a past time for a predetermined time (for example, one control cycle) from the current time, or may be a past time for an arbitrary time.
  • the bird's-eye view image PB t at the current time is as shown in Figure 4 (b).
  • the adjacent vehicle V2 (position P 2) is tilting occurs.
  • the white line drawn on the road surface has a rectangular shape, and is in a state of being relatively accurately viewed in plan, but the adjacent vehicle V2 (position P 2). ') Will fall down.
  • the vertical edges of solid objects are straight lines along the collapse direction by the viewpoint conversion processing to bird's-eye view image data. This is because the plane image on the road surface does not include a vertical edge, but such a fall does not occur even when the viewpoint is changed.
  • the alignment unit 32 performs alignment of the bird's-eye view images PB t and PB t ⁇ 1 as described above on the data. At this time, the alignment unit 32 offsets the bird's-eye view image PB t-1 at the previous time and matches the position with the bird's-eye view image PB t at the current time.
  • the image on the left side and the center image in FIG. 4B show a state that is offset by the movement distance d ′.
  • This offset amount d ′ is a movement amount on the bird's-eye view image data corresponding to the actual movement distance d of the host vehicle V1 shown in FIG. 4 (a). It is determined based on the time until the time.
  • the alignment unit 32 takes the difference between the bird's-eye view images PB t and PB t ⁇ 1 and generates data of the difference image PD t .
  • the alignment unit 32 converts the pixel value difference between the bird's-eye view images PB t and PB t ⁇ 1 to an absolute value in order to cope with a change in the illumination environment, and the absolute value is a predetermined value.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 detects a three-dimensional object based on the data of the difference image PD t shown in FIG. At this time, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 also calculates the movement distance of the three-dimensional object in the real space. In detecting the three-dimensional object and calculating the movement distance, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 first generates a differential waveform.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 sets a detection region in the difference image PD t .
  • the three-dimensional object detection device 1 of the present example is intended to calculate a movement distance for an adjacent vehicle that may be contacted when the host vehicle V1 changes lanes. For this reason, in this example, as shown in FIG. 2, rectangular detection areas A1, A2 are set on the rear side of the host vehicle V1. Such detection areas A1, A2 may be set from a relative position with respect to the host vehicle V1, or may be set based on the position of the white line. When setting the position of the white line as a reference, the three-dimensional object detection device 1 may use, for example, an existing white line recognition technique.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 recognizes the sides (sides along the traveling direction) of the set detection areas A1 and A2 on the own vehicle V1 side as the ground lines L1 and L2.
  • the ground line means a line in which the three-dimensional object contacts the ground.
  • the ground line is set as described above, not a line in contact with the ground. Even in this case, from experience, the difference between the ground line according to the present embodiment and the ground line obtained from the position of the original adjacent vehicle V2 is not too large, and there is no problem in practical use.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram illustrating how the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 generates a differential waveform.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 calculates a differential waveform from a portion corresponding to the detection areas A ⁇ b> 1 and A ⁇ b> 2 in the difference image PD t (right diagram in FIG. 4B) calculated by the alignment unit 32.
  • DW t is generated.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 generates a differential waveform DW t along the direction in which the three-dimensional object falls by viewpoint conversion.
  • the detection area A1 is described for convenience, but the difference waveform DW t is generated for the detection area A2 in the same procedure.
  • first three-dimensional object detection unit 33 defines a line La on the direction the three-dimensional object collapses on data of the difference image PD t. Then, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 counts the number of difference pixels DP indicating a predetermined difference on the line La.
  • the difference pixel DP indicating the predetermined difference is expressed by the pixel value of the difference image PD t as “0” and “1”, and the pixel indicating “1” is counted as the difference pixel DP. .
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 counts the number of difference pixels DP and then obtains an intersection point CP between the line La and the ground line L1. Then, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 associates the intersection CP with the count number, determines the horizontal axis position based on the position of the intersection CP, that is, the position on the vertical axis in the right diagram of FIG. The axis position, that is, the position on the right and left axis in the right diagram of FIG. 5 is determined and plotted as the count number at the intersection CP.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 defines lines Lb, Lc... In the direction in which the three-dimensional object falls, counts the number of difference pixels DP, and determines the horizontal axis position based on the position of each intersection CP. Then, the vertical axis position is determined from the count number (number of difference pixels DP) and plotted.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 generates the differential waveform DW t as shown in the right diagram of FIG.
  • the difference pixel PD on the data of the difference image PD t is a pixel that has changed in the images at different times, in other words, a location where a three-dimensional object exists.
  • the difference waveform DW t is generated by counting the number of pixels along the direction in which the three-dimensional object collapses and performing frequency distribution at the location where the three-dimensional object exists.
  • the differential waveform DW t is generated from the information in the height direction for the three-dimensional object.
  • the line La and the line Lb in the direction in which the three-dimensional object collapses have different distances overlapping the detection area A1. For this reason, if the detection area A1 is filled with the difference pixels DP, the number of difference pixels DP is larger on the line La than on the line Lb. For this reason, when the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 determines the vertical axis position from the count number of the difference pixels DP, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 is normalized based on the distance at which the lines La and Lb in the direction in which the three-dimensional object falls and the detection area A1 overlap. Turn into. As a specific example, in the left diagram of FIG.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 normalizes the count number by dividing it by the overlap distance.
  • the difference waveform DW t the line La on the direction the three-dimensional object collapses, the value of the differential waveform DW t corresponding to Lb is substantially the same.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a detection method of the adjacent vehicle by the three-dimensional object detection unit 33, and shows an example of the differential waveform DW t and the threshold value ⁇ for detecting the adjacent vehicle.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 determines whether or not the peak of the generated differential waveform DW t is greater than or equal to a threshold value ⁇ corresponding to the peak position of the differential waveform DW t .
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 determines that no adjacent vehicle exists in the detection areas A1 and A2, while the peak of the differential waveform DW t Is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value ⁇ , it is determined that there is an adjacent vehicle in the detection areas A1 and A2, thereby detecting the adjacent vehicle existing in the adjacent lane.
  • the differential waveform DW t is an aspect of pixel distribution information indicating a predetermined luminance difference
  • the “pixel distribution information” in the present embodiment is obtained when the captured image is converted into a bird's-eye view image. It can be positioned as information indicating the distribution state of “pixels having a luminance difference equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold” detected along the direction in which the three-dimensional object falls.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 distributes pixels whose luminance difference is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold th in the direction in which the three-dimensional object falls when the viewpoint is converted into the bird's-eye view image on the bird's-eye view image obtained by the viewpoint conversion unit 31.
  • the difference waveform DW t Based on this, a three-dimensional object is detected.
  • the threshold value ⁇ is set by the detection reference setting unit 35 shown in FIG.
  • the detection criterion setting unit 35 is set according to the rear distance from the camera 10 based on the certainty factor detected by the certainty factor determination unit 34 shown in FIG.
  • One of the threshold value ⁇ 1 and the second threshold value ⁇ 2 set according to the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source is set as a threshold value ⁇ for detecting the adjacent vehicle based on the differential waveform DW t. To do.
  • the certainty factor determination unit 34 travels in the adjacent adjacent lane on the rear side of the host vehicle (the lane adjacent to the second lane of the host vehicle).
  • the certainty of being a headlight of a vehicle (hereinafter referred to as an adjacent vehicle) is determined as a certainty factor.
  • the determination method of the certainty factor by the certainty factor determination part 34 is demonstrated. In this embodiment, as will be described later, detection of the light source is performed by the detection reference setting unit 35.
  • the certainty factor determination unit 34 determines the certainty factor that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle based on the number of detected light sources, the position of the light source, and the temporal change in the state of the light source. judge.
  • the certainty factor determination unit 34 is, for example, a street lamp or an illuminated signboard, and the head of the adjacent vehicle The possibility that the light is low is determined, and the certainty that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is determined to be low.
  • the certainty determination unit 34 detects based on the position of the light source, that is, the height of the light source (the position of the light source in the vertical direction), the position of the light source in the vehicle width direction, and the position of the light source in the traveling direction of the host vehicle.
  • the certainty factor that the light source that has been used is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is determined. For example, when the height of the light source is high, the certainty factor determination unit 34 determines that the detected light source is highly likely to be caused by a streetlight, and determines the certainty factor that the detected light source is a headlight of an adjacent vehicle. Judge low.
  • the certainty factor determination unit 34 uses the headlight of the adjacent vehicle that is located in the adjacent lane farther from the own vehicle than the adjacent lane as the position of the light source in the vehicle width direction is farther from the own vehicle. It is determined that there is a high possibility, and the certainty that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is determined to be high. Further, the certainty determination unit 34 determines that the detected light source is less likely to be a headlight of an adjacent vehicle as the position of the light source in the traveling direction of the host vehicle is farther from the host vehicle. The certainty that is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is determined low.
  • the certainty factor determination unit 34 determines the certainty factor that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle based on the temporal change in the state of the light source. For example, when the temporal change in the size of the detected light source is small, the certainty factor determination unit 34 uses a headlight of an adjacent vehicle that travels in an adjacent lane farther from the vehicle than the adjacent lane. It is determined that there is a high possibility, and the certainty factor that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is determined to be high. Further, for example, the certainty factor determination unit 34 detects the detected light source from the own vehicle rather than the adjacent lane even when the temporal change in the position of the detected light source is small or the temporal change in the luminance of the detected light source is small. It is determined that there is a high possibility that it is a headlight of an adjacent vehicle that travels in a distant adjacent lane, and the certainty that the detected light source is a headlight of the adjacent vehicle is determined to be high.
  • the certainty factor determination unit 34 comprehensively determines the certainty factor that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle based on the number of light sources, the position of the light sources, and the temporal change of the light source state. In this way, by comprehensively determining the number of light sources, the positions of the light sources, and the temporal changes in the state of the light sources, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the detected light sources are caused by the headlights of adjacent vehicles. Can be determined.
  • the certainty factor determination unit 34 may be configured to take into account the size of the detected light source when determining the certainty factor. For example, the certainty factor determination unit 34 can be configured to determine the certainty factor low when the size of the detected light source greatly deviates from the size of a general headlight of an adjacent vehicle adjacent to the vehicle.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 determines whether or not the certainty level determined by the certainty level determination unit 34 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.
  • the first threshold value ⁇ 1 set according to the rear distance is set as the threshold value ⁇ for detecting the adjacent vehicle based on the differential waveform DW t .
  • a second threshold value ⁇ 2 set according to the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source, which will be described later, is set as a threshold value ⁇ for detecting an adjacent vehicle based on the differential waveform DW t .
  • a method of setting the first threshold value ⁇ 1 according to the rear distance from the camera 10 will be described.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 detects positions in the detection areas A1, A2 corresponding to the lines La, Lb, Lc... In the direction in which the three-dimensional object shown in the left diagram of FIG. 5 falls (hereinafter, detection positions in the detection areas A1, A2). For each of the detection positions in the detection areas A1, A2 (for example, the average luminance of the difference pixels DP on the lines La, Lb, Lc... In the direction in which the three-dimensional object shown in the left diagram of FIG. And according to the back distance from the camera 10, 1st threshold value (alpha) 1 is set.
  • FIG. 7 is a graph showing an example of the relationship between 1 brightness and the first threshold value ⁇ at the detection position of the detection area A1, A2, 8, from the camera 10 rear distance and the first It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship with threshold value (alpha) 1 .
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 the higher the brightness at the detection position of the detection area A1, A2, the first threshold value alpha 1 corresponding to the detected position to a higher value Set.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 the higher the brightness at the detection position of the detection area A1, A2, the first threshold value alpha 1 corresponding to the detected position to a higher value Set.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 based on the first threshold value alpha 1 of the gain that is set in accordance with the rearward distance from the camera 10 is set in accordance with the luminance at the detection position of the detection area A1, A2 to the change the first threshold value alpha 1 was. For example, the detection reference setting unit 35 divides the detection areas A1 and A2 into three areas according to the rear distance from the camera 10, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. In the example shown in the left diagram of FIG. 8, the detection reference setting unit 35 includes the detection areas A1 and A2 in a region R1 where the rear distance from the camera 10 is less than the distance D1, and the rear distance from the camera 10 is the distance D1 or more.
  • the region R2 is divided into three regions: a region R2 less than the distance D2 and a region R3 whose rear distance from the camera 10 is equal to or greater than the distance D2 and less than the distance D3. Note that FIG. 8 is illustrated and described only the detection area A1, the first gain threshold alpha 1 Similarly, the detection area A2 is set.
  • the first threshold value alpha 1 of the gain is set in accordance with the rearward distance from the camera 10.
  • the rear distance from the camera 10 is not less distance D1 above, and, in the region is less than the distance D2 R2, the first threshold value alpha 1 of the gain is set to a constant value.
  • the detection area A1 in the region R1 rear distance is less than the distance D1 from the camera 10 has a higher gain than the first threshold value alpha 1 that is set in the region R2, also, more rearward distance from the camera 10 is small (closer to the host vehicle), the first gain threshold alpha 1 is higher.
  • the rear distance from the camera 10 even distance D2 or more regions R3 has a higher gain than the first threshold value alpha 1 that is set in the region R2, also from the camera 10 the larger the rearward distance (farther from the vehicle), the first gain threshold alpha 1 is higher.
  • FIG. 9A shows a scene in which the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 is detected in the region R2 in the detection region A2.
  • the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is irradiated linearly from the adjacent vehicle to the camera 10, and the light amount of the headlight incident on the camera 10 is Therefore, the luminance in the region R2 is higher than the other regions R1 and R2 in the detection region A2. Therefore, as shown in FIG.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 can set the threshold value ⁇ high in accordance with the high luminance in the region R2, as shown in FIG. 7, and thereby the head of the adjacent vehicle V3 in the region R2 can be set. It is possible to effectively prevent light from being erroneously detected as an adjacent vehicle.
  • FIG. 9A is illustrated with only the detection region A2, but the same applies to the detection region A1 (the same applies to FIGS. 9B and 9C described later).
  • FIG. 9B shows a scene in which the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 is detected in the region R1 within the detection region A2.
  • the headlight light emitted from the adjacent vehicle V3 is in the direction in which the host vehicle V1 exists. Only a part of the irradiated light enters the camera 10. For this reason, in the region R1 close to the host vehicle in the detection regions A1 and A2, the amount of headlight incident on the camera 10 is usually smaller and the luminance of the region R1 is lower than the region R2 in the detection regions A1 and A2. Become. Therefore, as shown in FIG.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 can change the threshold value ⁇ to a high value even when the brightness of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 detected in the region R1 is low. Even when the brightness of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 detected at R1 is low, it is possible to effectively prevent the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 from being erroneously detected as the adjacent vehicle V2.
  • FIG. 9C shows a scene in which the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 is detected in the region R3 in the detection region A2.
  • a region R3 far from the host vehicle has a plurality of vehicles positioned behind the detection regions A1 and A2 (for example, the adjacent vehicle V3 shown in FIG. 9C and the adjacent vehicle V3.
  • light of various luminances is emitted from a vehicle or the like existing behind. That is, the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 detected in the region R3 may be lower in brightness than the region R2, and in such a case, as shown in FIG.
  • the first threshold value ⁇ 1 May be erroneously detected as an adjacent vehicle if the image of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 irradiated to the region R3 is simply changed according to the luminance.
  • the luminance of the light of the headlight to be irradiated tends to vary, and there is a possibility that light with lower luminance is irradiated. is there.
  • the present embodiment as shown in FIG.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 can be changed even if the brightness of the headlight of the next adjacent vehicle V3 detected in region R3 is low, the first threshold value alpha 1 to a higher value, Thereby, even when the brightness of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 detected in the region R3 is low, it is effectively prevented that the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 is erroneously detected as the adjacent vehicle V2. Can do.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 sets a first threshold value alpha 1 according to the luminance at the detection position of the detection area A1, A2, the first threshold set alpha The first threshold corresponding to each detection position in the detection areas A1 and A2 as shown in FIG. 6 by changing the gain of 1 according to the rear distance from the camera 10 as shown in FIG. Set ⁇ 1 .
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 sets the first threshold value ⁇ 1 according to the luminance of the difference pixel DP on the line La shown in the left diagram of FIG.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 by calculating the first threshold value alpha 1 at the position corresponding to Lc ..., as shown in FIG. 6, the respective detection positions in the detection areas A1, A2 setting the first threshold value alpha 1 corresponding.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 sets a threshold value ⁇ so as to prevent the headlight light image of the adjacent vehicle V3 irradiated on the adjacent lane from being erroneously detected as an adjacent vehicle. It is. Therefore, in this embodiment, the first threshold value alpha 1 for changing the processing depending on the rearward distance from the camera 10, the conditions next adjacent vehicle V3 is headlights (e.g., at night) may be performed only . For example, when the luminance of the image captured by the camera 10 is equal to or lower than a predetermined value, the detection reference setting unit 35 determines that the adjacent adjacent vehicle V3 is in a condition for lighting the headlight (for example, at night). Can do.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 is a first threshold map showing the relationship between the luminance at the detection positions in the detection areas A1 and A2 and the predetermined threshold ⁇ 2 ′.
  • a second threshold map showing the relationship between the luminance at the detection positions in the detection areas A1 and A2 and the predetermined threshold ⁇ 2 ′′ is provided.
  • the second threshold map shown in Fig. 11 is, for example, the head of an adjacent vehicle (a vehicle existing in the adjacent adjacent lane adjacent to the two lanes in the own lane) in the detection areas A1 and A2. Detect even if light is detected In headlights around that, so as not to cause erroneous detection of the adjacent vehicle, is set to be a relatively high value threshold alpha 2 "even when the luminance is relatively low. Specifically, compared to the threshold the threshold alpha 2 'as defined in the first threshold value map shown in FIG. 10, a second threshold value alpha 2 ", which is defined in the threshold map of shown in FIG. 11, luminance even if low, is set so as not to be below a predetermined value S t.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 detects the threshold value ⁇ 2 ′ obtained from the first threshold map shown in FIG. 10 according to the luminance at the detection position in the detection regions A1 and A2, and the detection in the detection regions A1 and A2.
  • the threshold value ⁇ 2 ′′ obtained from the second threshold map shown in FIG. 11 in accordance with the luminance at the position the adjacent vehicle is detected at the detection positions in the detection areas A1 and A2 according to the following formula 1. calculating a second threshold value alpha 2 for.
  • Second threshold value ⁇ 2 ⁇ (1-wt) ⁇ threshold value ⁇ 2 ′ obtained from the first threshold map) + (wt ⁇ threshold value ⁇ 2 ′′ obtained from the second threshold map)
  • wt is a weight of the threshold ⁇ 2 ′′ obtained from the second threshold map (a map that emphasizes prevention of erroneous detection around the headlight), and this weight wt is shown in FIG. It is determined based on the control map shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 12 is an example of a control map that defines the weight wt of the threshold value ⁇ 2 ′′ obtained from the second threshold map.
  • the vertical axis represents the second threshold value.
  • the weight ⁇ of the threshold value ⁇ 2 ′′ obtained from the map is shown, and the position of the detected position in the traveling direction of the host vehicle is shown on the horizontal axis.
  • weight wt is "1" up.
  • the second threshold value alpha 2 at the reference position P O is obtained from the second threshold value map that emphasizes prevention of erroneous detection at around headlights equal to the threshold value alpha 2 "to be.
  • the weight wt also in the vicinity of the reference position P O is a value close to" 1 ". Therefore, when calculating the second threshold value alpha 2 according to the above equation 1, the second threshold value alpha 2 in the vicinity of the reference position P O is a value close to the threshold alpha 2 "obtained from the second threshold value map.
  • the weight wt is “0” at a position slightly behind the reference position P O behind the reference position P O compared to the front of the reference position P O. Therefore, when calculating the second threshold value alpha 2 according to the above equation 1, the reference position P second threshold alpha 2 in the rear of O is obtained from the first threshold value map easily detect the tire wheel of the adjacent vehicle It becomes equal to the threshold value ⁇ 2 ′. On the contrary, in front of the reference position PO , the weight wt of the threshold value ⁇ 2 ′′ obtained from the second threshold map changes with a high value. Therefore, the second threshold value ⁇ 2 is calculated according to the above equation 1. when, in front of the reference position P O, as compared to the rear reference position P O, so that the threshold value alpha 2 "with an emphasis on preventing the false detection of around headlights is calculated.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 uses the control map shown in FIG. 12 before calculating the second threshold value ⁇ 2 for detecting the adjacent vehicle.
  • the adjustment is made according to the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source.
  • the control map adjustment method shown in FIG. 12 will be described below with reference to FIG.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a method of adjusting the control map shown in FIG.
  • the detection reference design unit 35 first detects a light source such as a headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 from the captured image captured by the camera 10. Then, the detection reference setting unit 35 detects the position of the center of gravity of the detected light source, and sets a straight line Lc passing through the position of the center of gravity of the light source and the center position of the camera 10. Further, the detection reference setting unit 35 calculates an intersection O between the straight line Lc and a side (side along the traveling direction) L2 'on the adjacent adjacent lane side of the detection area A2. A method of detecting the light source by the detection reference setting unit 35 will be described later.
  • FIG. 13B illustrates a scene in which the adjacent vehicle V3 is close to the host vehicle V1 from the scene illustrated in FIG.
  • the intersection O between the straight line Lc and the line L2 ′ of the detection area A2 is the intersection O shown in FIG. Rather than forward (Y-axis negative direction). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13 (B) left, the detection reference setting unit 35, the position of the intersection point O shown in FIG.
  • control map shown in FIG. 12 is compared with the control map shown in the left figure of FIG. are generally shifted forward (Y-axis negative direction), thereby, the position of the light source, and the reference position P O of the control map shown in FIG. 12 so that the corresponding.
  • the weight wt of the threshold value 2 ′′ obtained from the threshold value map of 2 can be increased. Therefore, when the second threshold value ⁇ 2 is calculated according to the above equation 1, the area around the headlight in the area ahead of the light source Thus, the second threshold value ⁇ 2 that emphasizes prevention of erroneous detection at the point is obtained.
  • the weight wt of the threshold value ⁇ 2 ′′ obtained from the threshold map can be reduced. For this reason, when the second threshold value ⁇ 2 is calculated according to the above equation 1, in the region behind the light source, the tire of the adjacent vehicle The second threshold value ⁇ 2 that can be easily detected by the wheel is obtained.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 the light of headlights next adjacent vehicle to be irradiated on the adjacent lane, in order to effectively prevent the erroneous detection as the adjacent vehicle, changing the second threshold value alpha 2 To do. Therefore, in this embodiment, it can be set as the structure which performs the change of the 2nd threshold value (alpha) 2 by the detection reference setting part 35 only at night when an adjacent vehicle lights a headlight.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 may determine that it is nighttime, for example, when the luminance of an image captured by the camera 10 is equal to or less than a predetermined value.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 has the first threshold value ⁇ 1 set according to the rear distance from the camera 10 and the second threshold value ⁇ 2 set according to the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source. And can be set. Then, the detection criterion setting unit 35 determines whether or not the certainty factor determined by the certainty factor determination unit 34 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. If the certainty factor is less than the predetermined value, the first threshold value ⁇ 1 is set as a threshold value ⁇ for detecting an adjacent vehicle based on the differential waveform DW t . On the other hand, when the certainty factor is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the second threshold value ⁇ 2 is set to the differential waveform DW t . Based on this, a threshold value ⁇ for detecting the adjacent vehicle is set.
  • the description returns to the description of the three-dimensional object detection unit 33.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 After detecting the three-dimensional object present in the adjacent lane, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33, in contrast with the differential waveform DW t in one time before the differential waveform DW t-1 and the current time, of the three-dimensional object present on the adjacent vehicle Calculate the travel distance. That is, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 calculates the movement distance from the time change of the difference waveforms DW t and DW t ⁇ 1 .
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 divides the differential waveform DW t into a plurality of small areas DW t1 to DW tn (n is an arbitrary integer equal to or greater than 2).
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating the small areas DW t1 to DW tn divided by the three-dimensional object detection unit 33.
  • the small areas DW t1 to DW tn are divided so as to overlap each other, for example, as shown in FIG. For example, the small area DW t1 and the small area DW t2 overlap, and the small area DW t2 and the small area DW t3 overlap.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 obtains an offset amount (amount of movement of the differential waveform in the horizontal axis direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14)) for each of the small regions DW t1 to DW tn .
  • the offset amount is determined from the difference between the differential waveform DW t in the difference waveform DW t-1 and the current time before one unit time (distance in the horizontal axis direction).
  • three-dimensional object detection unit 33 for each small area DW t1 ⁇ DW tn, when moving the differential waveform DW t1 before one unit time in the horizontal axis direction, the differential waveform DW t at the current time The position where the error is minimized (the position in the horizontal axis direction) is determined, and the amount of movement in the horizontal axis between the original position of the differential waveform DW t ⁇ 1 and the position where the error is minimized is obtained as an offset amount. Then, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 counts the offset amount obtained for each of the small areas DW t1 to DW tn and forms a histogram.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of a histogram obtained by the three-dimensional object detection unit 33.
  • the offset amount which is the amount of movement that minimizes the error between each of the small areas DW t1 to DW tn and the difference waveform DW t ⁇ 1 one time before, has some variation.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 forms a histogram of offset amounts including variations, and calculates a movement distance from the histogram.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 calculates the moving distance of the adjacent vehicle from the maximum value of the histogram. That is, in the example illustrated in FIG.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 calculates the offset amount indicating the maximum value of the histogram as the movement distance ⁇ * .
  • the moving distance ⁇ * is a relative moving distance of the adjacent vehicle with respect to the host vehicle V1. For this reason, when calculating the absolute movement distance, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 calculates the absolute movement distance based on the obtained movement distance ⁇ * and the signal from the vehicle speed sensor 20.
  • a one-dimensional waveform is obtained by calculating the moving distance of the three-dimensional object from the offset amount of the differential waveform DW t when the error of the differential waveform DW t generated at different times is minimized.
  • the movement distance is calculated from the offset amount of the information, and the calculation cost can be suppressed in calculating the movement distance.
  • by dividing the differential waveform DW t generated at different times into a plurality of small areas DW t1 to DW tn it is possible to obtain a plurality of waveforms representing respective portions of the three-dimensional object.
  • the calculation accuracy of the movement distance can be improved. Further, in the present embodiment, by calculating the moving distance of the three-dimensional object from the time change of the differential waveform DW t including the information in the height direction, compared with a case where attention is paid only to one point of movement, Since the detection location before the time change and the detection location after the time change are specified including information in the height direction, it is likely to be the same location in the three-dimensional object, and the movement distance will be calculated from the time change of the same location, The calculation accuracy of the movement distance can be improved.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 weights each of the plurality of small areas DW t1 to DW tn and forms a histogram by counting the offset amount obtained for each of the small areas DW t1 to DW tn according to the weight. May be.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating weighting by the three-dimensional object detection unit 33.
  • the small area DW m (m is an integer of 1 to n ⁇ 1) is flat. That is, in the small area DW m , the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value of the number of pixels indicating a predetermined difference is small. Three-dimensional object detection unit 33 to reduce the weight for such small area DW m. This is because the flat small area DW m has no characteristics and is likely to have a large error in calculating the offset amount.
  • the small region DW m + k (k is an integer equal to or less than nm) is rich in undulations. That is, in the small area DW m , the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value of the number of pixels indicating a predetermined difference is large.
  • Three-dimensional object detection unit 33 increases the weight for such small area DW m. This is because the small region DW m + k rich in undulations is characteristic and there is a high possibility that the offset amount can be accurately calculated. By weighting in this way, the calculation accuracy of the movement distance can be improved.
  • the differential waveform DW t is divided into a plurality of small areas DW t1 to DW tn in order to improve the calculation accuracy of the movement distance.
  • the small area DW t1 is divided. It is not necessary to divide into ⁇ DW tn .
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 calculates the moving distance from the offset amount of the differential waveform DW t when the error between the differential waveform DW t and the differential waveform DW t ⁇ 1 is minimized. That is, the method for obtaining the offset amount of the difference waveform DW t in the difference waveform DW t-1 and the current time before one unit time is not limited to the above disclosure.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 obtains the moving speed of the host vehicle V1 (camera 10), and obtains the offset amount for the stationary object from the obtained moving speed. After obtaining the offset amount of the stationary object, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 ignores the offset amount corresponding to the stationary object among the maximum values of the histogram and calculates the moving distance of the adjacent vehicle.
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating another example of a histogram obtained by the three-dimensional object detection unit 33.
  • two maximum values ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 appear in the obtained histogram.
  • one of the two maximum values ⁇ 1, ⁇ 2 is the offset amount of the stationary object.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 calculates the offset amount for the stationary object from the moving speed, ignores the maximum value corresponding to the offset amount, and calculates the moving distance of the three-dimensional object by using the remaining maximum value. To do. Thereby, the situation where the calculation accuracy of the moving distance of a solid object falls by a stationary object can be prevented.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 stops calculating the movement distance. Thereby, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an erroneous movement distance having a plurality of maximum values is calculated.
  • FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the adjacent vehicle detection process of the present embodiment.
  • the computer 30 acquires data of the captured image P from the camera 10 (step S101), and the viewpoint conversion unit 31 performs bird's-eye view based on the acquired data of the captured image P.
  • Data of the image PB t is generated (step S102).
  • the alignment unit 33 aligns the data of the bird's-eye view image PB t and the data of the bird's-eye view image PB t ⁇ 1 one hour before, and generates data of the difference image PD t (step S103). . Then, three-dimensional object detection unit 33, from the data of the difference image PD t, pixel value by counting the number of difference pixel DP "1", to generate a difference waveform DW t (step S104).
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 sets a threshold value ⁇ for detecting an adjacent vehicle based on the differential waveform DW t (step S105).
  • FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the threshold value ⁇ setting processing in step S105. As shown in FIG. 19, the detection reference setting unit 35 first detects a light source such as a headlight of an adjacent vehicle from a captured image captured by the camera 10 (step S201).
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 eliminates the influence of noise and appropriately detects a headlight of another vehicle as a light source, so that the difference in brightness from the surroundings in the captured image is equal to or greater than a predetermined value s d And an image area having a size equal to or larger than the predetermined value s 1 is detected as an area corresponding to the light source.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 first performs edge processing of the captured image, and detects a region where the brightness difference from the surroundings is equal to or greater than the predetermined value sd as a light source candidate.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 does not limit the predetermined value sd to a constant value in order to appropriately detect the light source, for example, the rear distance from the camera 10 to the light source candidate.
  • the predetermined value s d can be changed based on the brightness of the region where the candidate exists.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 has a threshold map in which a predetermined value s d is set according to the luminance, and a threshold map in which the predetermined value s d is set according to the rear distance from the camera 10 to the light source candidate. and compares these two thresholds map, that the predetermined value s d of the higher of the prescribed value s d obtained for each threshold map is selected as the predetermined value s d for detecting the light source candidate it can.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 detects an image area having a size equal to or larger than the predetermined value s 1 among the detected light source candidates as an area corresponding to the light source.
  • the predetermined value s l is not limited to a certain value, for example, detection reference setting unit 35, in accordance with the rearward distance from the camera 10 to the light source candidates, may be changed a predetermined value s l. For example, when the length of the detection areas A1 and A2 in the traveling direction of the host vehicle is 10 m, the detection reference setting unit 35 moves the detection areas A1 and A2 from the position closest to the camera 10 in the detection areas A1 and A2.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 includes, for example, an image area in which the height ⁇ width is 5 ⁇ 5 pixels or more in the area R1 close to the own vehicle and the area R3 far from the own vehicle in the detection areas A1 and A2.
  • an image region having a height ⁇ width of 7 ⁇ 7 pixels or more is detected as a region corresponding to the light source. it can.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 sets the threshold ⁇ to a predetermined threshold, for example, and ends the threshold ⁇ setting processing in step S105.
  • the certainty factor determination unit 34 determines the certainty factor that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle adjacent to the rear side of the host vehicle (step S202). As described above, the certainty factor determination unit 34 is convinced that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle based on the number of light sources, the position of the light sources, the temporal change in the state of the light sources, and the size of the light sources. Determining the degree comprehensively. Then, the detection reference setting unit 35 determines whether or not the certainty factor is equal to or greater than a predetermined value based on the determination result of the certainty factor in step S202.
  • step S204 In order to set the threshold value ⁇ according to the rear distance from 10, the process proceeds to step S204, and when the certainty factor is less than the predetermined value, the threshold value ⁇ is set based on the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source. Then, the process proceeds to step S208.
  • step S208 the detection reference setting unit 35 sets a straight line Lc that passes through the center position of the detected light source and the center position of the camera 10, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 35 calculates an intersection O between the set straight line Lc and the side L2 ′ on the adjacent adjacent lane side of the detection area A2 (step S209). Then, the detection reference setting unit 35, as shown in FIG. 13 (B) left, so that the intersection point O calculated in step S209, and the reference position P O of the control map shown in FIG. 12 coincides, 12 Is adjusted (step S210).
  • the detection criterion setting unit 35 detects the first threshold map (see FIG. 7) in which the threshold ⁇ 2 ′ is set so that the tire wheel of the adjacent vehicle is easily detected, and erroneous detection around the headlight. Emphasizing prevention, the second threshold value ⁇ 2 ′′ in which the threshold value ⁇ 2 ′′ is set (see FIG. 8) and the control map adjusted in step S210 are used, and the second threshold value ⁇ 2 according to the above equation 1. is calculated (step S211).
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 determines whether or not the peak of the differential waveform DW t generated in step S104 is equal to or greater than the threshold value ⁇ generated in step S105 (step S106).
  • the peak of the difference waveform DW t is not equal to or greater than the threshold value ⁇ , that is, when there is almost no difference, it is considered that there is no adjacent vehicle in the captured image P.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 determines that there is no adjacent vehicle in the adjacent lane (step S115). The process shown in FIG. 18 ends.
  • step S106 Yes
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 determines that a three-dimensional object exists in the adjacent lane, and proceeds to step S107.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 divides the differential waveform DW t into a plurality of small areas DW t1 to DW tn .
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 performs weighting for each of the small areas DW t1 to DW tn (step S108), calculates an offset amount for each of the small areas DW t1 to DW tn (step S109), and adds the weights.
  • a histogram is generated (step S110).
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 calculates a relative movement distance that is a movement distance of the adjacent vehicle with respect to the own vehicle based on the histogram (step S111). Furthermore, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 calculates the absolute movement speed of the adjacent vehicle from the relative movement distance (step S112). At this time, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 calculates the relative movement speed by differentiating the relative movement distance with respect to time, and adds the own vehicle speed detected by the vehicle speed sensor 20 to calculate the absolute movement speed of the adjacent vehicle.
  • the rear sides of the host vehicle are set as detection areas A1 and A2, and emphasis is placed on whether or not there is a possibility of contact when the host vehicle changes lanes. For this reason, the process of step S113 is performed. That is, assuming that the system according to the present embodiment is operated on a highway, if the speed of the adjacent vehicle is less than 10 km / h, even if the adjacent vehicle exists, the host vehicle is required to change the lane. Because it is located far behind, there are few problems.
  • step S113 determining whether the absolute moving speed of the adjacent vehicle is 10 km / h or more and the relative moving speed of the adjacent vehicle with respect to the own vehicle is +60 km / h or less has the following effects.
  • the absolute moving speed of the stationary object may be detected to be several km / h. Therefore, by determining whether the speed is 10 km / h or more, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the stationary object is determined to be an adjacent vehicle.
  • the relative speed of the adjacent vehicle to the host vehicle may be detected as a speed exceeding +60 km / h. Therefore, the possibility of erroneous detection due to noise can be reduced by determining whether the relative speed is +60 km / h or less.
  • step S113 it may be determined that the absolute movement speed of the adjacent vehicle is not negative or not 0 km / h. Further, in this embodiment, since an emphasis is placed on whether or not there is a possibility of contact when the host vehicle changes lanes, a warning sound is sent to the driver of the host vehicle when an adjacent vehicle is detected in step S114. Or a display corresponding to a warning may be performed by a predetermined display device.
  • the detection areas A1 and A2 behind the host vehicle are captured at different times, the captured images are converted into bird's-eye view images, and based on the difference between the bird's-eye view images at different times.
  • the difference image PD t is generated.
  • the difference waveform DW t is generated from the data of the difference image PD t by counting the number of pixels indicating a predetermined difference and performing frequency distribution along the direction in which the three-dimensional object falls by the viewpoint conversion.
  • the peak of the generated differential waveform DW t is greater than or equal to a rearward distance from the camera 10 or a threshold value ⁇ set according to the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source, and the differential waveform DW.
  • the peak of t is equal to or greater than the threshold value ⁇ , it is possible to appropriately detect the adjacent vehicle existing in the adjacent lane by determining that the adjacent vehicle exists in the adjacent lane.
  • the certainty factor that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is determined.
  • the second threshold value ⁇ 2 obtained based on the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source is set as the threshold value ⁇ . That is, when there is a high possibility that the detected light source is a headlight of an adjacent vehicle, as shown in FIG.
  • the threshold value ⁇ is set in front of the light source to prevent erroneous detection around the headlight.
  • the threshold value ⁇ is set so that the tire wheel of the adjacent vehicle is easily detected behind the light source. Thereby, for example, even when the brightness of the periphery of the headlight (light source) is high due to contamination of the lens of the camera 10 and the tire wheel of the adjacent vehicle, which is a characteristic part existing behind the headlight (light source), is difficult to detect.
  • the threshold ⁇ is set to be high so as to prevent erroneous detection around the headlight. It can be effectively prevented, and in the rear of the headlight (light source), the threshold ⁇ is set so that the tire wheel of the adjacent vehicle can be easily detected, so it exists behind the headlight (light source). It is possible to properly detect the tire wheel of the adjacent vehicle.
  • the first threshold map (see FIG. 10) in which the threshold value ⁇ 2 ′ is set so as to easily detect the tire wheel of the adjacent vehicle, and the three-dimensional object by the light source.
  • a second threshold value map (see FIG. 11) in which a threshold value ⁇ 2 ′′ is set so as to prevent false detection, and when the certainty factor is equal to or greater than a predetermined value,
  • the threshold value ⁇ 2 ′ set and the threshold value ⁇ 2 ′′ set in the second threshold map are weighted according to the position from the light source with reference to the control map shown in FIG.
  • a threshold value ⁇ for detecting the adjacent vehicle is calculated.
  • the reference position P O position control map shown in FIG. 12 of the light source coincides, by adjusting the control map shown in FIG. 12, the reference position corresponding to the position of the light source In the region ahead of PO , the weight ⁇ of the threshold ⁇ 2 ′′ obtained from the second threshold map (threshold map that emphasizes prevention of erroneous detection of a three-dimensional object by the light source) becomes large, and the reference corresponding to the position of the light source in the region behind from the position P O, weight wt of the second threshold value map threshold ⁇ 2 obtained from (threshold map that emphasizes prevent erroneous detection of the three-dimensional object by a light source) "it is reduced.
  • the threshold value ⁇ for detecting the adjacent vehicle is higher in the area ahead of the light source, and the threshold value ⁇ for detecting the adjacent vehicle is lower in the area behind the light source.
  • the brightness of the periphery of the headlight (light source) is high due to dirt on the lens of the camera 10, and the tire wheel of the adjacent vehicle, which is a characteristic part existing behind the headlight (light source), is difficult to detect. Even in this case, it is possible to appropriately detect the tire wheel of the adjacent lane that exists behind the headlight (light source).
  • the threshold value ⁇ for detecting the adjacent vehicle can be increased with respect to the brightness in the area in front of the headlight (light source), such reflection is performed. It is possible to effectively prevent a light image from being erroneously detected as an adjacent vehicle.
  • the first threshold value ⁇ 1 obtained based on the rear distance from the camera 10 is set as the threshold value ⁇ . That is, when the possibility that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is low, as shown in FIG. 8, in the detection areas A1 and A2, the area R1 close to the own vehicle and the area far from the own vehicle In R3, the gain of the threshold value ⁇ is set higher than that in the central region R2. Thereby, in the regions R1 and R3, the threshold value ⁇ can be set high even when the luminance of the headlight light emitted from the headlight from the adjacent vehicle is low, and the regions R1 and R3 are irradiated with the adjacent light. It is possible to effectively prevent erroneous detection of the light image of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 as the adjacent vehicle.
  • the first threshold value alpha 1 obtained based on the rearward distance from the camera 10 is set as the threshold alpha
  • confidence is greater than a predetermined value in some cases, setting the second threshold value alpha 2 obtained on the basis of the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source as the threshold alpha.
  • the certainty factor is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, that is, when the possibility that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is high, the second obtained based on the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source.
  • threshold alpha 2 to be to the threshold alpha, when the detected light source is likely to be headlights next adjacent vehicle, the first threshold value alpha 1 obtained based on the rearward distance from the camera 10 Compared with the case where the threshold value ⁇ is set, it is possible to eliminate the influence of the headlights of the adjacent vehicles and to obtain a higher effect of appropriately detecting the adjacent vehicles.
  • the certainty factor is less than a predetermined value, that is, when the possibility that the detected light source is a headlight of the adjacent vehicle is low, the second obtained based on the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source.
  • the threshold value alpha 2 is set as the threshold alpha, for example, too much is set higher threshold alpha in the front than light, erroneous detection can not be properly detected neighboring vehicle when an adjacent vehicle actually exists It might happen. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the certainty factor is less than a predetermined value, the certainty factor is less than the predetermined value by setting the first threshold value ⁇ 1 obtained based on the rear distance from the camera 10 as the threshold value ⁇ .
  • the second threshold value alpha 2 obtained on the basis of the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source as compared with the case of setting the threshold value alpha, the erroneous detection of the adjacent vehicle with light of headlights next adjacent vehicle It can prevent more effectively and can detect an adjacent vehicle more appropriately.
  • the three-dimensional object detection device 1a according to the second embodiment includes a computer 30 a instead of the computer 30 of the first embodiment, except that it operates as described below. This is the same as in the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 20 is a block diagram illustrating details of the computer 30a according to the second embodiment.
  • the three-dimensional object detection device 1a includes a camera 10 and a computer 30a.
  • the computer 30a includes a viewpoint conversion unit 31, a luminance difference calculation unit 36, and an edge line detection unit. 37, a three-dimensional object detection unit 33a, a certainty factor determination unit 34, and a detection reference setting unit 35a.
  • FIGS. 21A and 21B are diagrams illustrating an imaging range and the like of the camera 10 in FIG. 20.
  • FIG. 21A is a plan view
  • FIG. 21B is a perspective view in real space rearward from the host vehicle V1. Show.
  • the camera 10 has a predetermined angle of view a, and images the rear side from the host vehicle V1 included in the predetermined angle of view a.
  • the angle of view a of the camera 10 is set so that the imaging range of the camera 10 includes the adjacent lane in addition to the lane in which the host vehicle V1 travels.
  • the detection areas A1 and A2 in this example are trapezoidal in a plan view (when viewed from a bird's eye), and the positions, sizes, and shapes of the detection areas A1 and A2 are determined based on the distances d 1 to d 4. Is done.
  • the detection areas A1 and A2 in the example shown in the figure are not limited to a trapezoidal shape, and may be other shapes such as a rectangle when viewed from a bird's eye view as shown in FIG.
  • the distance d1 is a distance from the host vehicle V1 to the ground lines L1 and L2.
  • the ground lines L1 and L2 mean lines on which a three-dimensional object existing in the lane adjacent to the lane in which the host vehicle V1 travels contacts the ground.
  • the object is to detect adjacent vehicles V2 and the like (including two-wheeled vehicles) traveling in the left and right lanes adjacent to the lane of the host vehicle V1 on the rear side of the host vehicle V1.
  • a distance d1 which is a position to be the ground lines L1, L2 of the adjacent vehicle V2 is determined from a distance d11 from the own vehicle V1 to the white line W and a distance d12 from the white line W to a position where the adjacent vehicle V2 is predicted to travel. It can be determined substantially fixedly.
  • the distance d1 is not limited to being fixedly determined, and may be variable.
  • the computer 30a recognizes the position of the white line W with respect to the host vehicle V1 by a technique such as white line recognition, and determines the distance d11 based on the recognized position of the white line W.
  • the distance d1 is variably set using the determined distance d11.
  • the distance d1 is It shall be fixedly determined.
  • the distance d2 is a distance extending in the vehicle traveling direction from the rear end portion of the host vehicle V1.
  • the distance d2 is determined so that the detection areas A1 and A2 are at least within the angle of view a of the camera 10.
  • the distance d2 is set so as to be in contact with the range divided into the angle of view a.
  • the distance d3 is a distance indicating the length of the detection areas A1, A2 in the vehicle traveling direction. This distance d3 is determined based on the size of the three-dimensional object to be detected. In the present embodiment, since the detection target is the adjacent vehicle V2 or the like, the distance d3 is set to a length including the adjacent vehicle V2.
  • the distance d4 is a distance indicating a height set so as to include a tire such as the adjacent vehicle V2 in the real space.
  • the distance d4 is a length shown in FIG. 21A in the bird's-eye view image.
  • the distance d4 may be a length that does not include a lane that is further adjacent to the left and right lanes in the bird's-eye view image (that is, the adjacent lane that is adjacent to two lanes). If the lane adjacent to the two lanes is included from the lane of the own vehicle V1, there is an adjacent vehicle V2 in the adjacent lane on the left and right of the own lane that is the lane in which the own vehicle V1 is traveling. This is because it becomes impossible to distinguish whether there is an adjacent vehicle on the lane.
  • the distances d1 to d4 are determined, and thereby the positions, sizes, and shapes of the detection areas A1 and A2 are determined. More specifically, the position of the upper side b1 of the detection areas A1 and A2 forming a trapezoid is determined by the distance d1. The starting point position C1 of the upper side b1 is determined by the distance d2. The end point position C2 of the upper side b1 is determined by the distance d3. The side b2 of the detection areas A1 and A2 having a trapezoidal shape is determined by a straight line L3 extending from the camera 10 toward the starting point position C1.
  • a side b3 of trapezoidal detection areas A1 and A2 is determined by a straight line L4 extending from the camera 10 toward the end position C2.
  • the position of the lower side b4 of the detection areas A1 and A2 having a trapezoidal shape is determined by the distance d4.
  • the areas surrounded by the sides b1 to b4 are set as the detection areas A1 and A2.
  • the detection areas A1 and A2 are true squares (rectangles) in real space on the rear side from the host vehicle V1.
  • the viewpoint conversion unit 31 inputs captured image data of a predetermined area obtained by imaging with the camera 10.
  • the viewpoint conversion unit 31 performs viewpoint conversion processing on the input captured image data to the bird's-eye image data in a bird's-eye view state.
  • the bird's-eye view is a state seen from the viewpoint of a virtual camera looking down from above, for example, vertically downward (or slightly obliquely downward).
  • This viewpoint conversion process can be realized by a technique described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-219063.
  • the luminance difference calculation unit 36 calculates a luminance difference with respect to the bird's-eye view image data subjected to viewpoint conversion by the viewpoint conversion unit 31 in order to detect the edge of the three-dimensional object included in the bird's-eye view image. For each of a plurality of positions along a vertical imaginary line extending in the vertical direction in the real space, the brightness difference calculation unit 36 calculates a brightness difference between two pixels in the vicinity of each position.
  • the luminance difference calculation unit 36 can calculate the luminance difference by either a method of setting only one vertical virtual line extending in the vertical direction in the real space or a method of setting two vertical virtual lines.
  • the brightness difference calculating unit 36 applies a first vertical imaginary line corresponding to a line segment extending in the vertical direction in the real space and a vertical direction in the real space different from the first vertical imaginary line with respect to the bird's eye view image that has undergone viewpoint conversion.
  • a second vertical imaginary line corresponding to the extending line segment is set.
  • the luminance difference calculation unit 36 continuously obtains the luminance difference between the point on the first vertical imaginary line and the point on the second vertical imaginary line along the first vertical imaginary line and the second vertical imaginary line.
  • the operation of the luminance difference calculation unit 36 will be described in detail.
  • the luminance difference calculation unit 36 corresponds to a line segment extending in the vertical direction in real space and passes through the detection area A1 (hereinafter, attention line La). Set).
  • the luminance difference calculation unit 36 corresponds to a line segment extending in the vertical direction in the real space and also passes through the detection area A1 and is a second vertical imaginary line Lr (hereinafter referred to as a reference line Lr).
  • the reference line Lr is set at a position separated from the attention line La by a predetermined distance in the real space.
  • the line corresponding to the line segment extending in the vertical direction in the real space is a line that spreads radially from the position Ps of the camera 10 in the bird's-eye view image.
  • This radially extending line is a line along the direction in which the three-dimensional object falls when converted to bird's-eye view.
  • the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets a point of interest Pa (a point on the first vertical imaginary line) on the line of interest La.
  • the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets a reference point Pr (a point on the second vertical plate) on the reference line Lr.
  • the attention line La, the attention point Pa, the reference line Lr, and the reference point Pr have the relationship shown in FIG. 22B in the real space.
  • the attention line La and the reference line Lr are lines extending in the vertical direction in the real space, and the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr are substantially the same height in the real space. This is the point that is set.
  • the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr do not necessarily have the same height, and an error that allows the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr to be regarded as the same height is allowed.
  • the luminance difference calculation unit 36 calculates a luminance difference between the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr. If the luminance difference between the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr is large, it is considered that an edge exists between the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr.
  • a vertical virtual line is set as a line segment extending in the vertical direction in the real space with respect to the bird's-eye view image, In the case where the luminance difference between the attention line La and the reference line Lr is high, there is a high possibility that there is an edge of the three-dimensional object at the set position of the attention line La. For this reason, the edge line detection unit 37 shown in FIG. 20 detects an edge line based on the luminance difference between the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr.
  • FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a detailed operation of the luminance difference calculation unit 36
  • FIG. 23 (a) shows a bird's-eye view image in a bird's-eye view state
  • FIG. 23 (b) is shown in FIG. 23 (a). It is the figure which expanded a part B1 of the bird's-eye view image. 23, only the detection area A1 is illustrated and described, but the luminance difference is calculated in the same procedure for the detection area A2.
  • the adjacent vehicle V2 When the adjacent vehicle V2 is reflected in the captured image captured by the camera 10, the adjacent vehicle V2 appears in the detection area A1 in the bird's-eye view image as shown in FIG. As shown in the enlarged view of the region B1 in FIG. 23A in FIG. 23B, it is assumed that the attention line La is set on the rubber portion of the tire of the adjacent vehicle V2 on the bird's-eye view image.
  • the luminance difference calculation unit 36 first sets a reference line Lr.
  • the reference line Lr is set along the vertical direction at a position away from the attention line La by a predetermined distance in the real space.
  • the reference line Lr is set at a position separated from the attention line La by 10 cm in the real space.
  • the reference line Lr is set on the wheel of the tire of the adjacent vehicle V2, which is separated from the rubber of the tire of the adjacent vehicle V2, for example, by 10 cm, on the bird's eye view image.
  • the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets a plurality of attention points Pa1 to PaN on the attention line La.
  • attention point Pai when an arbitrary point is indicated
  • the number of attention points Pa set on the attention line La may be arbitrary.
  • N attention points Pa are set on the attention line La.
  • the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets the reference points Pr1 to PrN so as to be the same height as the attention points Pa1 to PaN in the real space. Then, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 calculates the luminance difference between the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr having the same height. Accordingly, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 calculates the luminance difference between the two pixels for each of a plurality of positions (1 to N) along the vertical imaginary line extending in the vertical direction in the real space. The luminance difference calculation unit 36 calculates, for example, a luminance difference between the first attention point Pa1 and the first reference point Pr1, and a luminance difference between the second attention point Pa2 and the second reference point Pr2. Will be calculated.
  • the luminance difference calculation unit 36 continuously obtains the luminance difference along the attention line La and the reference line Lr. That is, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sequentially obtains the luminance difference between the third to Nth attention points Pa3 to PaN and the third to Nth reference points Pr3 to PrN.
  • the luminance difference calculation unit 36 repeatedly executes the processing such as setting the reference line Lr, setting the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr, and calculating the luminance difference while shifting the attention line La in the detection area A1. That is, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 repeatedly executes the above processing while changing the positions of the attention line La and the reference line Lr by the same distance in the extending direction of the ground line L1 in the real space. For example, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets a line that has been the reference line Lr in the previous process as the attention line La, sets the reference line Lr for the attention line La, and sequentially obtains the luminance difference. It will be.
  • the edge extending in the vertical direction is obtained by calculating the luminance difference from the attention point Pa on the attention line La and the reference point Pr on the reference line Lr that are substantially the same height in the real space. It is possible to clearly detect a luminance difference in the case where there is. Also, in order to compare the brightness of vertical virtual lines extending in the vertical direction in real space, even if the three-dimensional object is stretched according to the height from the road surface by converting to a bird's-eye view image, The detection process is not affected, and the detection accuracy of the three-dimensional object can be improved.
  • the edge line detection unit 37 detects the edge line from the continuous luminance difference calculated by the luminance difference calculation unit 36. For example, in the case illustrated in FIG. 23B, the first attention point Pa1 and the first reference point Pr1 are located in the same tire portion, and thus the luminance difference is small. On the other hand, the second to sixth attention points Pa2 to Pa6 are located in the rubber part of the tire, and the second to sixth reference points Pr2 to Pr6 are located in the wheel part of the tire. Therefore, the luminance difference between the second to sixth attention points Pa2 to Pa6 and the second to sixth reference points Pr2 to Pr6 becomes large. Therefore, the edge line detection unit 37 may detect that an edge line exists between the second to sixth attention points Pa2 to Pa6 and the second to sixth reference points Pr2 to Pr6 having a large luminance difference. it can.
  • the edge line detection unit 37 firstly follows the following Equation 2 to determine the i-th attention point Pai (coordinates (xi, yi)) and the i-th reference point Pri (coordinates ( xi ′, yi ′)) and the i th attention point Pai are attributed.
  • Equation 2 t represents a predetermined threshold, I (xi, yi) represents the luminance value of the i-th attention point Pai, and I (xi ′, yi ′) represents the luminance value of the i-th reference point Pri.
  • t represents a predetermined threshold
  • I (xi, yi) represents the luminance value of the i-th attention point Pai
  • I (xi ′, yi ′) represents the luminance value of the i-th reference point Pri.
  • the attribute s (xi, yi) of the attention point Pai is “ ⁇ 1”.
  • the attribute s (xi, yi) of the attention point Pai is “0”.
  • the edge line detection unit 37 determines whether or not the attention line La is an edge line from the continuity c (xi, yi) of the attribute s along the attention line La based on Equation 3 below.
  • the continuity c (xi, yi) is “1”.
  • the attribute s (xi, yi) of the attention point Pai is not the same as the attribute s (xi + 1, yi + 1) of the adjacent attention point Pai + 1
  • the continuity c (xi, yi) is “0”.
  • the edge line detection unit 37 obtains the sum for the continuity c of all the attention points Pa on the attention line La.
  • the edge line detection unit 37 normalizes the continuity c by dividing the obtained sum of continuity c by the number N of points of interest Pa. Then, the edge line detection unit 37 determines that the attention line La is an edge line when the normalized value exceeds the threshold ⁇ .
  • the threshold value ⁇ is a value set in advance through experiments or the like.
  • the edge line detection unit 37 determines whether or not the attention line La is an edge line based on Equation 4 below. Then, the edge line detection unit 37 determines whether or not all the attention lines La drawn on the detection area A1 are edge lines. [Equation 4] ⁇ c (xi, yi) / N> ⁇
  • the attention point Pa is attributed based on the luminance difference between the attention point Pa on the attention line La and the reference point Pr on the reference line Lr, and the attribute along the attention line La is attributed. Since it is determined whether the attention line La is an edge line based on the continuity c of the image, the boundary between the high luminance area and the low luminance area is detected as an edge line, and an edge in line with a natural human sense Detection can be performed. This effect will be described in detail.
  • FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image for explaining the processing of the edge line detection unit 37.
  • 102 is an adjacent image.
  • a region where the brightness of the first striped pattern 101 is high and a region where the brightness of the second striped pattern 102 is low are adjacent to each other, and a region where the brightness of the first striped pattern 101 is low and the second striped pattern 102. Is adjacent to a region with high brightness.
  • the portion 103 located at the boundary between the first striped pattern 101 and the second striped pattern 102 tends not to be perceived as an edge depending on human senses.
  • the edge line detection unit 37 determines the part 103 as an edge line only when the luminance difference attribute has continuity in addition to the luminance difference in the part 103. An erroneous determination of recognizing a part 103 that is not recognized as an edge line as a sensation as an edge line can be suppressed, and edge detection according to a human sensation can be performed.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a detects a three-dimensional object based on the amount of edge lines detected by the edge line detection unit 37.
  • the three-dimensional object detection device 1a detects an edge line extending in the vertical direction in real space. The fact that many edge lines extending in the vertical direction are detected means that there is a high possibility that a three-dimensional object exists in the detection areas A1 and A2. For this reason, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a detects a three-dimensional object based on the amount of edge lines detected by the edge line detection unit 37.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a determines whether the amount of edge lines detected by the edge line detection unit 37 is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value ⁇ , and the amount of edge lines is determined to be a predetermined threshold value ⁇ .
  • the edge line detected by the edge line detection unit 37 is determined to be an edge line of a three-dimensional object, thereby detecting the three-dimensional object based on the edge line as the adjacent vehicle V2.
  • the edge line is an aspect of pixel distribution information indicating a predetermined luminance difference
  • the “pixel distribution information” in the present embodiment is a three-dimensional object when a captured image is converted into a bird's-eye view image. It can be positioned as information indicating the distribution state of “pixels having a luminance difference equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold” detected along the falling direction. That is, in the bird's-eye view image obtained by the viewpoint conversion unit 31, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a distributes pixels whose luminance difference is greater than or equal to the threshold value t along the direction in which the three-dimensional object falls when the viewpoint is converted into the bird's-eye view image.
  • the degree of pixel distribution the amount of edge lines
  • the three-dimensional object is detected based on the pixel distribution information (edge line).
  • the threshold value ⁇ for detecting the adjacent vehicle based on the edge line is set by the detection reference setting unit 35a.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35a is set according to the rear distance from the camera 10 based on the certainty factor detected by the certainty factor determination unit 34 shown in FIG. 20 as in the first embodiment.
  • One of the third threshold value ⁇ 1 and the fourth threshold value ⁇ 2 set according to the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source is used as a threshold value ⁇ for detecting an adjacent vehicle based on the edge line.
  • the detection criterion setting unit 35a determines whether or not the certainty level determined by the certainty level determination unit 34 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.
  • the third threshold value ⁇ 1 set according to the distance is set as a threshold value ⁇ for detecting the adjacent vehicle based on the edge line.
  • the camera 10 and the light source the fourth threshold value beta 2 which is set in accordance with the positional relationship between, is set as the threshold value beta for detecting adjacent vehicle based on the edge lines.
  • the certainty factor determination unit 34 is adjacent to the detected light source based on the number of detected light sources, the position of the light sources, and the temporal change in the state of the light sources, as in the first embodiment.
  • the reliability that is the headlight of the vehicle is comprehensively determined. In this way, by comprehensively determining the number of light sources, the positions of the light sources, and the temporal changes in the state of the light sources, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the detected light sources are caused by the headlights of adjacent vehicles. Can be determined.
  • the certainty factor determination unit 34 can be configured to take into account the size of the detected light source when determining the certainty factor.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35a detects positions within the detection areas A1 and A2 (for example, positions corresponding to the attention line La within the detection areas A1 and A2).
  • the third threshold value ⁇ 1 is set to a higher value as the luminance at () is higher.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35a as shown in FIG.
  • the third threshold value ⁇ 1 set in accordance with the luminance is changed to a higher value than the region R 2 in the detection areas A 1, A 2.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35a in the region R1 of the detection area A1, A2, as rear distance from the camera 10 is small (closer to the host vehicle), by increasing the third gain threshold beta 1
  • the third threshold value ⁇ 1 set in accordance with the brightness is changed to a higher value as it is closer to the host vehicle.
  • detection reference setting unit 35a in the region R3 of the detection area A1, A2, than the region R2 of the detection area A1, A2, the third threshold value beta 1 of the gain the by increasing, in the region R3 in the detection area A1, A2, compared to the region R2 of the detection area A1, A2, to change to a higher value of the third threshold value beta 1, which is set according to the brightness.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35a in the area R3 in the detection areas A1, A2 are more rearward distance from the camera 10 is larger (farther from the vehicle), increasing the third gain threshold beta 1 in, in the region R3 in the detection area A1, A2 is further away from the vehicle, it is changed to a higher value of the third threshold value beta 1, which is set according to the brightness.
  • the headlight irradiated from the adjacent vehicle V3 in the scene where the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 is irradiated to an adjacent lane at night for example.
  • an image of the light of the headlight is displayed on the adjacent vehicle. Can be effectively prevented from being erroneously detected.
  • detecting the reference portion setting unit 35a is the fourth threshold value beta 2
  • the detection reference setting unit 35a detects in the detection areas A1 and A2 so as to easily detect the tire wheel that is a characteristic part of the adjacent vehicle, as shown in FIG.
  • a third threshold map in which a predetermined threshold value ⁇ 2 ′ is set according to the luminance at the position, and a detection region A1 so that no erroneous detection of adjacent vehicles occurs around the headlight.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35a is the same as in the first embodiment.
  • a control map defining the weight wt of the threshold value ⁇ 2 ′′ obtained from the fourth threshold value map is provided.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35a determines whether or not the certainty factor determined by the certainty factor determination unit 34 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. If the certainty factor is less than the predetermined value, the third threshold value ⁇ 1 is set as the threshold value ⁇ for detecting the adjacent vehicle based on the edge line. On the other hand, when the certainty factor is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the fourth threshold value ⁇ 2 is set based on the edge line. Is set as a threshold value ⁇ for detecting.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a determines whether or not the edge line detected by the edge line detection unit 37 is correct.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a determines whether or not the luminance change along the edge line of the bird's-eye view image on the edge line is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value tb.
  • a predetermined threshold value tb When the brightness change of the bird's-eye view image on the edge line is equal to or greater than the threshold value tb, it is determined that the edge line has been detected by erroneous determination.
  • the luminance change of the bird's-eye view image on the edge line is less than the threshold value tb, it is determined that the edge line is correct.
  • the threshold value tb is a value set in advance by experiments or the like.
  • FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating the luminance distribution of the edge line
  • FIG. 30A illustrates the edge line and the luminance distribution when the adjacent vehicle V2 as a three-dimensional object is present in the detection area A1
  • FIG. Indicates an edge line and a luminance distribution when there is no solid object in the detection area A1.
  • the attention line La set in the tire rubber portion of the adjacent vehicle V2 is determined to be an edge line in the bird's-eye view image.
  • the luminance change of the bird's-eye view image on the attention line La is gentle. This is because the tire of the adjacent vehicle V2 is extended in the bird's-eye view image by converting the image captured by the camera 10 into a bird's-eye view image.
  • FIG. 30B it is assumed that the attention line La set in the white character portion “50” drawn on the road surface in the bird's-eye view image is erroneously determined as an edge line.
  • the brightness change of the bird's-eye view image on the attention line La has a large undulation. This is because a portion with high brightness in white characters and a portion with low brightness such as a road surface are mixed on the edge line.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a determines whether or not the edge line is detected by erroneous determination.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a has detected the edge line by erroneous determination, and the edge line is caused by the three-dimensional object.
  • the edge line is caused by the three-dimensional object.
  • white characters such as “50” on the road surface, weeds on the road shoulder, and the like are determined as edge lines, and the detection accuracy of the three-dimensional object is prevented from being lowered.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a determines that the edge line is an edge line of the three-dimensional object, and the three-dimensional object exists. Judge.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a calculates the luminance change of the edge line according to any one of the following formulas 6 and 7.
  • the luminance change of the edge line corresponds to the evaluation value in the vertical direction in the real space.
  • Equation 6 evaluates the luminance distribution by the sum of the squares of the differences between the i-th luminance value I (xi, yi) on the attention line La and the adjacent i + 1-th luminance value I (xi + 1, yi + 1). .
  • Expression 7 is a luminance distribution based on the sum of absolute values of differences between the i-th luminance value I (xi, yi) on the attention line La and the adjacent i + 1-th luminance value I (xi + 1, yi + 1).
  • Evaluation value in the vertical equivalent direction ⁇ [ ⁇ I (xi, yi) ⁇ I (xi + 1, yi + 1) ⁇ 2 ]
  • Evaluation value in the vertical equivalent direction
  • the attribute b (xi, yi) of the attention point Pa (xi, yi) is “1”. Become. If the relationship is other than that, the attribute b (xi, yi) of the attention point Pai is '0'.
  • This threshold value t2 is set in advance by an experiment or the like in order to determine that the attention line La is not on the same three-dimensional object. Then, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a sums the attributes b for all the attention points Pa on the attention line La and obtains an evaluation value in the vertical equivalent direction, whereby the edge line is caused by the three-dimensional object. It is determined whether or not a three-dimensional object exists.
  • FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing details of the adjacent vehicle detection method according to the present embodiment.
  • processing for the detection area A1 will be described, but the same processing is executed for the detection area A2.
  • step S301 the camera 10 captures an image of a predetermined area specified by the angle of view a and the attachment position, and the computer 30a acquires image data of the captured image P captured by the camera 10.
  • step S302 the viewpoint conversion unit 31 performs viewpoint conversion on the acquired image data to generate bird's-eye view image data.
  • step S303 the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets the attention line La on the detection area A1. At this time, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets a line corresponding to a line extending in the vertical direction in the real space as the attention line La.
  • step S304 the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets a reference line Lr on the detection area A1. At this time, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets a reference line Lr that corresponds to a line segment extending in the vertical direction in the real space and is separated from the attention line La by a predetermined distance in the real space.
  • the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets a plurality of attention points Pa on the attention line La in step S305. At this time, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets a number of attention points Pa that do not cause a problem when the edge is detected by the edge line detection unit 37. In step S306, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets the reference point Pr so that the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr are substantially the same height in the real space. Thereby, the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr are arranged in a substantially horizontal direction, and it becomes easy to detect an edge line extending in the vertical direction in the real space.
  • step S307 the luminance difference calculation unit 36 calculates the luminance difference between the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr that have the same height in the real space.
  • the edge line detection unit 37 calculates the attribute s of each attention point Pa according to Equation 2 above.
  • step S308 the edge line detection unit 37 calculates the continuity c of the attribute s of each attention point Pa according to the above mathematical formula 3.
  • step S311 the computer 30a determines whether or not the processing in steps S303 to S310 has been executed for all the attention lines La that can be set on the detection area A1.
  • step S312 the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a calculates a luminance change along the edge line for each edge line detected in step S310.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a calculates the luminance change of the edge line according to any one of the above formulas 6, 7, and 8.
  • step S313 the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a excludes edge lines whose luminance change is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value tb from among the edge lines. That is, it is determined that an edge line having a large luminance change is not a correct edge line, and the edge line is not used for detecting a three-dimensional object. As described above, this is to prevent characters on the road surface, roadside weeds, and the like included in the detection area A1 from being detected as edge lines.
  • the predetermined threshold value tb is a value set based on a luminance change generated by characters on the road surface, weeds on the road shoulder, or the like, which is obtained in advance through experiments or the like.
  • the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a determines an edge line whose luminance change is less than the predetermined threshold value tb among the edge lines as an edge line of the three-dimensional object, and thereby detects a three-dimensional object existing in the adjacent vehicle. .
  • step S314 the threshold value ⁇ for determining whether or not the three-dimensional object detected in step S313 is an adjacent vehicle is set by the detection reference setting unit 35a.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35a detects the light source on the rear side of the host vehicle, as in step S105 of the first embodiment, and the detected light source is the next adjacent vehicle on the rear side of the host vehicle.
  • a certainty factor indicating the certainty of being a headlight is determined.
  • the third threshold value beta 1 and set as a threshold value beta for detecting adjacent vehicle based on the edge lines, whereas, confidence There If it is less than the predetermined value, the fourth threshold value beta 2, is set as the threshold value beta for detecting adjacent vehicle based on the edge lines.
  • step S315 the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a determines whether the amount of the edge line is equal to or larger than the threshold value ⁇ set in step S314.
  • step S315 Yes
  • step S316 the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a determines in step S316 that an adjacent vehicle exists in the detection area A1.
  • step S317 the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a determines in step S317 that there is no adjacent vehicle in the detection area A1. Then, the process shown in FIG. 31 is complete
  • a captured image is converted into a bird's-eye view image, and edge information of the three-dimensional object is detected from the converted bird's-eye view image. Then, it is determined whether or not the amount of edge lines detected in the bird's-eye view image is equal to or larger than a threshold value ⁇ set according to the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source, and the amount of edge lines is equal to or larger than the threshold value ⁇ . In this case, it is possible to appropriately detect the three-dimensional object existing in the adjacent lane by determining that the three-dimensional object exists in the adjacent lane.
  • the light source of the back side of the own vehicle is detected, and the certainty that the detected light source is a headlight of the adjacent vehicle adjacent to the vehicle is detected. judge.
  • the third threshold value ⁇ 1 obtained based on the rear distance from the camera 10 is set as the threshold value ⁇ , while when the certainty factor is equal to or larger than the predetermined value.
  • the fourth threshold ⁇ 2 obtained based on the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source is set as the threshold ⁇ .
  • the second embodiment in addition to the effects of the first embodiment, when detecting the adjacent vehicle based on the edge information, if the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle, the dirt on the lens. Even when the brightness around the headlight (light source) is high, the tire wheel of the adjacent vehicle, which is a characteristic part of the adjacent vehicle existing behind the headlight (light source), can be detected appropriately, and the head In front of the light (light source), it is possible to effectively prevent erroneous detection of the adjacent vehicle due to the reflected light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle adjacent to the road, and even if it is not the headlight of the adjacent vehicle Adjacent vehicles can be detected appropriately.
  • the threshold value ⁇ 2 ′ obtained from the first threshold map shown in FIG. 10 and the threshold value ⁇ obtained from the second threshold map shown in FIG. 2 ′′ is weighted with the weight wt defined in the control map shown in FIG. 12 and the second threshold value ⁇ 2 is calculated.
  • the present invention is not limited to this configuration.
  • FIG. Without using the second threshold map shown in FIG. 4, the threshold value ⁇ 2 ′ obtained from the first threshold map shown in FIG. 10 is set to the weight wt defined in the control map shown in FIG. in weighted, it may calculate the second threshold value alpha 2.
  • Second threshold ⁇ 2 (wt ⁇ threshold ⁇ 2 ′ obtained from first threshold map)
  • the weight wt at the reference position P O has become a x (x> 1), in the rear from the reference position P O, the weight wt is set to be 1 . Further, in the control map shown in FIG. 32, similarly to the control map shown in FIG. 12, in front of the reference position P O, than the rear reference position P O, the weight wt is remained at a high value. Therefore, even in this case, when the position of the light source and the reference position PO are made to correspond to each other, the adjacent vehicle existing behind the headlight (light source) is effectively prevented while erroneously detecting adjacent vehicles around the headlight. The tire wheel in the lane can be detected appropriately, and as a result, the adjacent vehicle traveling in the adjacent lane can be detected appropriately.
  • the difference between the pixel values of the bird's-eye view images PB t and PB t ⁇ 1 is converted into an absolute value, and when the absolute value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold th, the difference image PD t
  • the configuration in which the pixel value is “1” and the pixel value of the difference image PD t is “0” when the absolute value is less than the predetermined threshold th has been exemplified. It is good also as a structure changed according to this positional relationship.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 detects the detection regions A1, 1, for example, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. In the region R1 and the region R3 in A2, the gain of the threshold th is made larger than that in the region R2 in the detection regions A1 and A2.
  • the certainty factor is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, As shown in the right figure, among the detection areas A1 and A2, in the area Rf in front of the light source, the gain of the threshold th may be larger than in the area Rr behind the light source.
  • the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle becomes difficult to be detected as the differential waveform DW t , and the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is used as the adjacent vehicle. It is possible to effectively prevent erroneous detection.
  • the certainty factor is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, for example, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 13A, in the detection region A1, A2, in the region Rf in front of the light source, the region Rr behind the light source.
  • the gain of the threshold th may be increased.
  • the threshold value th is set to a high value with respect to the luminance, so that it is difficult for the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 to be detected as the differential waveform DW t.
  • the threshold th may be changed in accordance with the luminance at the detection positions in the detection areas A1 and A2.
  • the alignment unit 32 detects the pixel value of the difference image PD t as “0” or “1”, and based on the difference image PD t , the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 detects the pixel value.
  • the configuration in which the three-dimensional object is detected by counting the pixels having the pixel value “1” of the difference image PD t as the difference pixel DP is exemplified. However, the configuration is not limited to this configuration.
  • the unit 32 detects the pixel value of the difference image PD t with the absolute value of the difference between the pixel values of the bird's-eye view images PB t and PB t ⁇ 1 , and the solid object detection unit 33 sets a predetermined difference threshold value. It is good also as a structure which counts the pixel exceeding it as the difference pixel DP.
  • the captured image at the current time and the image one hour before are converted into a bird's-eye view, and after the alignment of the converted bird's-eye view is performed, the difference image PD t is generated and generated.
  • the difference image PD t is evaluated along the falling direction (the falling direction of the three-dimensional object when the captured image is converted into a bird's eye view)
  • the configuration for generating the difference waveform DW t is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the following configuration may be used.
  • collapsing the difference image PD t direction corresponding to the direction may be configured to generate a difference waveform DW t by evaluating along.
  • the difference image PD t is generated from the difference between the two images subjected to the alignment, and the difference image PD t is converted into a bird's eye view
  • the bird's-eye view does not necessarily have to be clearly generated as long as the evaluation can be performed along the direction in which the user falls.
  • the vehicle speed of the own vehicle V1 is judged based on the signal from the speed sensor 20, it is not restricted to this, As a structure which estimates a speed from the several image at different time. Good. In this case, the vehicle speed sensor 20 is not necessary, and the configuration can be simplified.
  • the threshold value ⁇ 2 ′ obtained from the first threshold map and the first value are used in order to appropriately detect the tire wheel of the adjacent vehicle.
  • the threshold value ⁇ 2 ′′ obtained from the threshold map of 2 is weighted with the weight wt defined in the control map shown in FIG. 12, the configuration in which the threshold value ⁇ is lowered behind the position of the light source is illustrated.
  • a distance L in the vehicle width direction from the center position of the camera 10 to the gravity center position of the light source is calculated, and a threshold value behind the reference threshold value P O corresponding to the light source is calculated according to the distance L.
  • the detected light source travels in an adjacent lane farther from the own lane.
  • the headlight of the adjacent vehicle may be configured to increase the threshold value ⁇ at the rear of the light source by determining that the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is highly likely. It is possible to effectively prevent erroneous detection of an adjacent vehicle due to the light.
  • the attribute s of the attention point Pai is set to “1” or “ ⁇ 1”,
  • An attention line La in which the attribute s (xi, yi) of the point Pai and the attribute s (xi + 1, yi + 1) of the adjacent attention point Pai + 1 are “1” or “ ⁇ 1” continuously over a predetermined threshold ⁇
  • the threshold value t and the threshold value ⁇ may be changed according to the position of the detected light source.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 detects the detection region in the regions R1 and R3 in the detection regions A1 and A2, for example, as shown in the left diagram of FIG.
  • the gains of the threshold value t and the threshold value ⁇ are made larger than the area R2 in A1 and A2, and the certainty level is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, for example, as shown in the right figure of FIG. Of A1 and A2, in the region Rf in front of the light source, the gains of the threshold value t and the threshold value ⁇ may be larger than those in the region Rr behind the light source.
  • the luminance change of the edge line is calculated according to any one of the above formulas 6, 7, and 8, and among the edge lines, the edge line whose luminance change is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value tb.
  • the threshold value tb may be changed according to the position of the detected light source.
  • the detection reference setting unit 35 detects the detection region in the regions R1 and R3 in the detection regions A1 and A2, for example, as shown in the left diagram of FIG.
  • the gain of the threshold value tb is made larger than the region R2 in A1 and A2
  • the certainty factor is greater than or equal to the predetermined value, for example, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 13A
  • the detection regions A1 and A2 Among these, in the region Rf in front of the light source, the gain of the threshold value tb may be larger than that in the region Rr behind the light source.
  • the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle, the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle becomes difficult to be detected as an edge line, and the headlight light image of the adjacent vehicle is Can be effectively prevented from being erroneously detected.
  • the camera 10 of the above-described embodiment corresponds to the imaging unit of the present invention
  • the viewpoint conversion unit 31 corresponds to the image conversion unit of the present invention
  • the units 35 and 35a, the luminance difference calculation unit 36, and the edge line detection unit 37 correspond to the three-dimensional object detection unit of the present invention
  • the detection reference setting units 35 and 35a correspond to the light source detection unit of the present invention.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Image Analysis (AREA)
  • Image Processing (AREA)
  • Traffic Control Systems (AREA)
  • Closed-Circuit Television Systems (AREA)
  • Control Of Driving Devices And Active Controlling Of Vehicle (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)

Abstract

 The present invention is provided with: an imaging means (10) that images a predetermined area rearward of a host vehicle; an image conversion means (31) that converts the viewpoint of the captured image to an overhead view image; a three-dimensional object detection means (32, 33) that generates difference waveform information by counting and creating a frequency distribution of the number of pixels indicating a difference equal to or greater than a predetermined first threshold value in a difference image in which overhead view images taken at different times are aligned, and, if the difference waveform information is equal to or greater than a predetermined second threshold value, detects a three-dimensional object present in an adjacent lane on the basis of the difference waveform information; and a light source detection means (34) that detects a light source present rearward of the host vehicle. If the light source detection means (34) detects a light source, the first and second threshold values are set higher in a forward area farther ahead than a line that connects the light source and the imaging means (10) in the predetermined area, such that three-dimensional objects are more difficult to detect.

Description

立体物検出装置Three-dimensional object detection device
 本発明は、立体物検出装置に関するものである。
 本出願は、2012年3月1日に出願された日本国特許出願の特願2012-045349に基づく優先権を主張するものであり、文献の参照による組み込みが認められる指定国については、上記の出願に記載された内容を参照により本出願に組み込み、本出願の記載の一部とする。
The present invention relates to a three-dimensional object detection device.
This application claims priority based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2012-045349 filed on Mar. 1, 2012. For designated countries that are allowed to be incorporated by reference, The contents described in the application are incorporated into the present application by reference and made a part of the description of the present application.
 従来より、異なる時刻に撮像された2枚の撮像画像を鳥瞰視画像に変換し、変換した2枚の鳥瞰視画像の差分に基づいて、障害物を検出する技術が知られている(特許文献1参照)。 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a technique is known in which two captured images captured at different times are converted into a bird's-eye view image, and an obstacle is detected based on the difference between the two converted bird's-eye view images (Patent Literature). 1).
特開2008-227646号公報JP 2008-227646 A
 夜間、自車両後方を撮像した画像を用いて、自車両が走行する車線に隣接する隣接車線を走行する他車両を検出する場合、隣接車線に隣接する車線(以下、隣隣接車線ともいう)を走行する他車両のヘッドライトの光が検出領域に照射されると、このヘッドライトの光の像を、隣接車線を走行する他車両として誤検出してしまう場合がある。ヘッドライトの光は輝度が高いという特徴があるため、輝度の高さに応じて隣隣接車線を走行する車両のヘッドライトの光を識別することもできるが、撮像装置のレンズが汚れている場合には、隣隣接車線を走行する他車両のヘッドライトの光が乱反射して、ヘッドライト周辺の輝度が高くなってしまい、ヘッドライト周辺に位置する隣接車両を適切に検出することができないという問題があった。 When detecting other vehicles traveling in an adjacent lane adjacent to the lane in which the host vehicle travels using an image obtained by capturing the rear of the host vehicle at night, the lane adjacent to the adjacent lane (hereinafter also referred to as the adjacent adjacent lane) When the light of the headlight of another vehicle that travels is irradiated on the detection area, the headlight light image may be erroneously detected as another vehicle traveling in the adjacent lane. Headlight light is characterized by high brightness, so it is possible to identify the light of the headlight of a vehicle traveling in the adjacent lane according to the brightness, but the lens of the imaging device is dirty The problem is that the light of the headlights of other vehicles traveling in the adjacent adjacent lane is diffusely reflected, and the brightness around the headlights increases, so that the adjacent vehicles located around the headlights cannot be detected properly. was there.
 本発明が解決しようとする課題は、自車両が走行する車線に隣接する隣接車線を走行する他車両を検出する際に、他車両のヘッドライトの影響を排除し、隣接車線を走行する他車両を正確に検出することである。 The problem to be solved by the present invention is to eliminate the influence of the headlight of another vehicle and detect the other vehicle traveling in the adjacent lane when detecting the other vehicle traveling in the adjacent lane adjacent to the lane in which the host vehicle is traveling. Is accurately detected.
 本発明は、自車両後方に存在する光源を検出し、検出した光源と撮像装置とを結ぶ線よりも前方の領域において、立体物が検出され難いように、隣接車線に存在する立体物を検出するための検出基準を高くすることで、上記課題を解決する。 The present invention detects a light source existing behind the host vehicle and detects a three-dimensional object existing in an adjacent lane so that a three-dimensional object is difficult to detect in a region ahead of the line connecting the detected light source and the imaging device. The above-mentioned problem is solved by increasing the detection standard for doing so.
 本発明によれば、ヘッドライト(光源)前方の領域において、隣接車両の検出基準を高くすることで、ヘッドライト周辺での隣接車両の誤検出を有効に防止しつつ、ヘッドライト(光源)より後方に存在する隣接車線のタイヤホイールを適切に検出することができるため、隣接車線を走行する隣接車両を適切に検出することができる。 According to the present invention, in the area in front of the headlight (light source), by increasing the detection standard of the adjacent vehicle, it is possible to effectively prevent erroneous detection of the adjacent vehicle around the headlight, and from the headlight (light source). Since the tire wheel of the adjacent lane existing behind can be detected appropriately, the adjacent vehicle traveling in the adjacent lane can be detected appropriately.
図1は、第1実施形態に係る立体物検出装置を搭載した車両の概略構成図である。FIG. 1 is a schematic configuration diagram of a vehicle equipped with the three-dimensional object detection device according to the first embodiment. 図2は、図1の車両の走行状態を示す平面図である。FIG. 2 is a plan view showing a traveling state of the vehicle of FIG. 図3は、第1実施形態に係る計算機の詳細を示すブロック図である。FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing details of the computer according to the first embodiment. 図4は、第1実施形態に係る位置合わせ部の処理の概要を説明するための図であり、(a)は車両の移動状態を示す平面図、(b)は位置合わせの概要を示す画像である。FIGS. 4A and 4B are diagrams for explaining the outline of the processing of the alignment unit according to the first embodiment, in which FIG. 4A is a plan view showing the moving state of the vehicle, and FIG. 4B is an image showing the outline of alignment. It is. 図5は、第1実施形態に係る立体物検出部による差分波形の生成の様子を示す概略図である。FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram illustrating how a differential waveform is generated by the three-dimensional object detection unit according to the first embodiment. 図6は、第1実施形態に係る隣接車両の検出方法を説明するための図である。FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a method of detecting an adjacent vehicle according to the first embodiment. 図7は、検出領域A1,A2内の検出位置における輝度と、第1の閾値αとの関係の一例を示すグラフである。Figure 7 is a graph showing the brightness at the detected position of the detection area A1, A2, an example of a first relation between the threshold alpha 1. 図8は、カメラからの後方距離と、第1の閾値αとの関係を説明するための図である。Figure 8 is a diagram for explaining a rear distance from the camera, the first relationship between the threshold alpha 1. 図9Aは、検出領域A1,A2内の領域R2に隣隣接車両のヘッドライトの光が照射される場面を示す図である。FIG. 9A is a diagram illustrating a scene in which the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is irradiated on the region R2 in the detection regions A1 and A2. 図9Bは、検出領域A1,A2内の領域R1に隣隣接車両のヘッドライトの光が照射される場面を示す図である。FIG. 9B is a diagram illustrating a scene in which the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is irradiated on the region R1 in the detection regions A1 and A2. 図9Cは、検出領域A1,A2内の領域R3に隣隣接車両のヘッドライトの光が照射される場面を示す図である。FIG. 9C is a diagram illustrating a scene in which the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is irradiated on the region R3 in the detection regions A1 and A2. 図10は、検出領域A1,A2内の検出位置における輝度と、閾値α’との関係を示す第1の閾値マップの一例を示すグラフである。FIG. 10 is a graph showing an example of a first threshold map showing the relationship between the brightness at the detection positions in the detection areas A1 and A2 and the threshold α 2 ′. 図11は、検出領域A1,A2内の検出位置における輝度と、閾値α”との関係を示す第2の閾値マップの一例を示す図である。FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a second threshold map showing the relationship between the luminance at the detection positions in the detection areas A1 and A2 and the threshold α 2 ″. 図12は、第2の閾値マップから得られる閾値α”の重みwtを規定した制御マップの一例を示す図である。FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control map that defines the weight wt of the threshold value α 2 ″ obtained from the second threshold map. 図13は、図12に示す制御マップの調整方法を説明するための図である。FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a method of adjusting the control map shown in FIG. 図14は、第1実施形態に係る立体物検出部によって分割される小領域を示す図である。FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a small region divided by the three-dimensional object detection unit according to the first embodiment. 図15は、第1実施形態に係る立体物検出部により得られるヒストグラムの一例を示す図である。FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of a histogram obtained by the three-dimensional object detection unit according to the first embodiment. 図16は、第1実施形態に係る立体物検出部による重み付けを示す図である。FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating weighting by the three-dimensional object detection unit according to the first embodiment. 図17は、第1実施形態に係る立体物検出部により得られるヒストグラムの他の例を示す図である。FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating another example of a histogram obtained by the three-dimensional object detection unit according to the first embodiment. 図18は、第1実施形態に係る隣接車両検出方法を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating the adjacent vehicle detection method according to the first embodiment. 図19は、ステップS105の閾値αの設定処理を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the threshold value α setting process in step S105. 図20は、第2実施形態に係る計算機の詳細を示すブロック図である。FIG. 20 is a block diagram illustrating details of the computer according to the second embodiment. 図21は、車両の走行状態を示す図であり、(a)は検出領域等の位置関係を示す平面図、(b)は実空間における検出領域等の位置関係を示す斜視図である。FIGS. 21A and 21B are diagrams illustrating the traveling state of the vehicle, in which FIG. 21A is a plan view illustrating the positional relationship of the detection region and the like, and FIG. 21B is a perspective view illustrating the positional relationship of the detection region and the like in real space. 図22は、第2実施形態に係る輝度差算出部の動作を説明するための図であり、(a)は鳥瞰視画像における注目線、参照線、注目点及び参照点の位置関係を示す図、(b)は実空間における注目線、参照線、注目点及び参照点の位置関係を示す図である。FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the luminance difference calculation unit according to the second embodiment. FIG. 22A is a diagram showing the positional relationship among the attention line, reference line, attention point, and reference point in the bird's-eye view image. (B) is a figure which shows the positional relationship of the attention line, reference line, attention point, and reference point in real space. 図23は、第2実施形態に係る輝度差算出部の詳細な動作を説明するための図であり、(a)は鳥瞰視画像における検出領域を示す図、(b)は鳥瞰視画像における注目線、参照線、注目点及び参照点の位置関係を示す図である。23A and 23B are diagrams for explaining the detailed operation of the luminance difference calculation unit according to the second embodiment, in which FIG. 23A is a diagram showing a detection area in a bird's-eye view image, and FIG. 23B is an attention in a bird's-eye view image. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of a line, a reference line, an attention point, and a reference point. 図24は、エッジ検出動作を説明するための画像例を示す図である。FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image for explaining the edge detection operation. 図25は、検出領域A1,A2内の検出位置における輝度と、第3の閾値βとの関係の一例を示すグラフである。Figure 25 is a graph showing the brightness at the detected position of the detection area A1, A2, an example of a third relationship between the threshold value beta 1. 図26は、カメラからの後方距離と、第3の閾値βとの関係を説明するための図である。Figure 26 is a diagram for explaining a rear distance from the camera, a third relationship between the threshold value beta 1. 図27は、検出領域A1,A2内における輝度と、閾値β’との関係を示す第3の閾値マップの一例を示す図である。FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of a third threshold map indicating the relationship between the luminance in the detection areas A1 and A2 and the threshold β 2 ′. 図28は、検出領域A1,A2内における輝度と、閾値β”との関係を示す第4の閾値マップの一例を示す図である。FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of a fourth threshold map showing the relationship between the luminance in the detection areas A1 and A2 and the threshold value β 2 ″. 図29は、第4の閾値マップから得られる閾値β”の重みwtを規定した制御マップの一例を示す図である。FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control map defining the weight wt of the threshold value β 2 ″ obtained from the fourth threshold map. 図30は、エッジ線とエッジ線上の輝度分布を示す図であり、(a)は検出領域に立体物(隣接車両)が存在している場合の輝度分布を示す図、(b)は検出領域に立体物が存在しない場合の輝度分布を示す図である。30A and 30B are diagrams showing the edge line and the luminance distribution on the edge line, where FIG. 30A is a diagram showing the luminance distribution when a three-dimensional object (adjacent vehicle) is present in the detection area, and FIG. 30B is the detection area. It is a figure which shows luminance distribution when a solid object does not exist in FIG. 図31は、第2実施形態に係る隣接車両検出方法を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an adjacent vehicle detection method according to the second embodiment. 図32は、他の実施形態に係る制御マップを示す図である。FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a control map according to another embodiment.
 《第1実施形態》
 図1は、第1実施形態に係る立体物検出装置1を搭載した車両の概略構成図である。本実施形態に係る立体物検出装置1は、自車両V1が車線変更する際に接触の可能性がある隣接車線に存在する車両(以下、隣接車両V2ともいう。)を検出することを目的とする。本実施形態に係る立体物検出装置1は、図1に示すように、カメラ10と、車速センサ20と、計算機30とを備える。
<< First Embodiment >>
FIG. 1 is a schematic configuration diagram of a vehicle equipped with a three-dimensional object detection device 1 according to the first embodiment. The three-dimensional object detection device 1 according to the present embodiment is intended to detect a vehicle (hereinafter also referred to as an adjacent vehicle V2) that exists in an adjacent lane that may be contacted when the host vehicle V1 changes lanes. To do. As shown in FIG. 1, the three-dimensional object detection device 1 according to the present embodiment includes a camera 10, a vehicle speed sensor 20, and a calculator 30.
 カメラ10は、図1に示すように、自車両V1の後方における高さhの箇所において、光軸が水平から下向きに角度θとなるように車両V1に取り付けられている。カメラ10は、この位置から自車両V1の周囲環境のうちの所定領域を撮像する。車速センサ20、自車両V1の走行速度を検出するものであって、例えば車輪に回転数を検知する車輪速センサで検出した車輪速から車速度を算出する。計算機30は、自車両後方の隣接車線に存在する隣接車両の検出を行う。 As shown in FIG. 1, the camera 10 is attached to the vehicle V <b> 1 so that the optical axis is at an angle θ downward from the horizontal at a position of the height h behind the host vehicle V <b> 1. The camera 10 captures an image of a predetermined area in the surrounding environment of the host vehicle V1 from this position. The vehicle speed sensor 20 detects the traveling speed of the host vehicle V1, and calculates the vehicle speed from the wheel speed detected by, for example, a wheel speed sensor that detects the rotational speed of the wheel. The computer 30 detects an adjacent vehicle existing in an adjacent lane behind the host vehicle.
 図2は、図1の自車両V1の走行状態を示す平面図である。同図に示すように、カメラ10は、所定の画角aで車両後方側を撮像する。このとき、カメラ10の画角aは、自車両V1が走行する車線に加えて、その左右の車線(隣接車線)についても撮像可能な画角に設定されている。 FIG. 2 is a plan view showing a traveling state of the host vehicle V1 of FIG. As shown in the figure, the camera 10 images the vehicle rear side at a predetermined angle of view a. At this time, the angle of view a of the camera 10 is set to an angle of view at which the left and right lanes (adjacent lanes) can be imaged in addition to the lane in which the host vehicle V1 travels.
 図3は、図1の計算機30の詳細を示すブロック図である。なお、図3においては、接続関係を明確とするためにカメラ10、車速センサ20についても図示する。 FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing details of the computer 30 of FIG. In FIG. 3, the camera 10 and the vehicle speed sensor 20 are also illustrated in order to clarify the connection relationship.
 図3に示すように、計算機30は、視点変換部31と、位置合わせ部32と、立体物検出部33と、確信度判定部34と、検出基準設定部35とを備える。以下に、それぞれの構成について説明する。 As shown in FIG. 3, the computer 30 includes a viewpoint conversion unit 31, a positioning unit 32, a three-dimensional object detection unit 33, a certainty factor determination unit 34, and a detection reference setting unit 35. Below, each structure is demonstrated.
 視点変換部31は、カメラ10による撮像にて得られた所定領域の撮像画像データを入力し、入力した撮像画像データを鳥瞰視される状態の鳥瞰画像データに視点変換する。鳥瞰視される状態とは、上空から例えば鉛直下向きに見下ろす仮想カメラの視点から見た状態である。この視点変換は、例えば特開2008-219063号公報に記載されるようにして実行することができる。撮像画像データを鳥瞰視画像データに視点変換するのは、立体物に特有の鉛直エッジは鳥瞰視画像データへの視点変換により特定の定点を通る直線群に変換されるという原理に基づき、これを利用すれば平面物と立体物とを識別できるからである。 The viewpoint conversion unit 31 inputs captured image data of a predetermined area obtained by imaging with the camera 10, and converts the viewpoint of the input captured image data into bird's-eye image data in a bird's-eye view state. The state viewed from a bird's-eye view is a state viewed from the viewpoint of a virtual camera looking down from above, for example, vertically downward. This viewpoint conversion can be executed as described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-219063. The viewpoint conversion of captured image data to bird's-eye view image data is based on the principle that a vertical edge peculiar to a three-dimensional object is converted into a straight line group passing through a specific fixed point by viewpoint conversion to bird's-eye view image data. This is because a planar object and a three-dimensional object can be distinguished if used.
 位置合わせ部32は、視点変換部31の視点変換により得られた鳥瞰視画像データを順次入力し、入力した異なる時刻の鳥瞰視画像データの位置を合わせる。図4は、位置合わせ部32の処理の概要を説明するための図であり、(a)は自車両V1の移動状態を示す平面図、(b)は位置合わせの概要を示す画像である。 The alignment unit 32 sequentially inputs the bird's-eye view image data obtained by the viewpoint conversion of the viewpoint conversion unit 31 and aligns the positions of the inputted bird's-eye view image data at different times. 4A and 4B are diagrams for explaining the outline of the processing of the alignment unit 32, where FIG. 4A is a plan view showing the moving state of the host vehicle V1, and FIG. 4B is an image showing the outline of the alignment.
 図4(a)に示すように、現時刻の自車両V1がPに位置し、一時刻前の自車両V1がP’に位置していたとする。また、自車両V1の後側方向に隣接車両V2が位置して自車両V1と並走状態にあり、現時刻の隣接車両V2がPに位置し、一時刻前の隣接車両V2がP’に位置していたとする。さらに、自車両V1は、一時刻で距離d移動したものとする。なお、一時刻前とは、現時刻から予め定められた時間(例えば1制御周期)だけ過去の時刻であってもよいし、任意の時間だけ過去の時刻であってもよい。 As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the host vehicle V1 of the current time is located in P 1, one unit time before the vehicle V1 is located in the P 1 '. Further, there is a parallel running state with the vehicle V1 is located is adjacent vehicle V2 laterally after the vehicle V1, located in P 2 adjacent vehicle V2 is the current time, one unit time before the adjacent vehicle V2 is P 2 Suppose it is located at '. Furthermore, it is assumed that the host vehicle V1 has moved a distance d at one time. Note that “one hour before” may be a past time for a predetermined time (for example, one control cycle) from the current time, or may be a past time for an arbitrary time.
 このような状態において、現時刻における鳥瞰視画像PBは図4(b)に示すようになる。この鳥瞰視画像PBでは、路面上に描かれる白線については矩形状となり、比較的正確に平面視された状態となるが、隣接車両V2(位置P)については倒れ込みが発生する。また、一時刻前における鳥瞰視画像PBt-1についても同様に、路面上に描かれる白線については矩形状となり、比較的正確に平面視された状態となるが、隣接車両V2(位置P’)については倒れ込みが発生する。既述したとおり、立体物の鉛直エッジ(厳密な意味の鉛直エッジ以外にも路面から三次元空間に立ち上がったエッジを含む)は、鳥瞰視画像データへの視点変換処理によって倒れ込み方向に沿った直線群として現れるのに対し、路面上の平面画像は鉛直エッジを含まないので、視点変換してもそのような倒れ込みが生じないからである。 In this state, the bird's-eye view image PB t at the current time is as shown in Figure 4 (b). In the bird's-eye view image PB t, becomes a rectangular shape for the white line drawn on the road surface, but a relatively accurate is a plan view state, the adjacent vehicle V2 (position P 2) is tilting occurs. Similarly, in the bird's-eye view image PB t-1 one hour before, the white line drawn on the road surface has a rectangular shape, and is in a state of being relatively accurately viewed in plan, but the adjacent vehicle V2 (position P 2). ') Will fall down. As described above, the vertical edges of solid objects (including the edges that rise in the three-dimensional space from the road surface in addition to the vertical edges in the strict sense) are straight lines along the collapse direction by the viewpoint conversion processing to bird's-eye view image data. This is because the plane image on the road surface does not include a vertical edge, but such a fall does not occur even when the viewpoint is changed.
 位置合わせ部32は、上記のような鳥瞰視画像PB,PBt-1の位置合わせをデータ上で実行する。この際、位置合わせ部32は、一時刻前における鳥瞰画像PBt-1をオフセットさせ、現時刻における鳥瞰視画像PBと位置を一致させる。図4(b)の左側の画像と中央の画像は、移動距離d’だけオフセットした状態を示す。このオフセット量d’は、図4(a)に示した自車両V1の実際の移動距離dに対応する鳥瞰視画像データ上の移動量であり、車速センサ20からの信号と一時刻前から現時刻までの時間に基づいて決定される。 The alignment unit 32 performs alignment of the bird's-eye view images PB t and PB t−1 as described above on the data. At this time, the alignment unit 32 offsets the bird's-eye view image PB t-1 at the previous time and matches the position with the bird's-eye view image PB t at the current time. The image on the left side and the center image in FIG. 4B show a state that is offset by the movement distance d ′. This offset amount d ′ is a movement amount on the bird's-eye view image data corresponding to the actual movement distance d of the host vehicle V1 shown in FIG. 4 (a). It is determined based on the time until the time.
 また、位置合わせ後において位置合わせ部32は、鳥瞰視画像PB,PBt-1の差分をとり、差分画像PDのデータを生成する。ここで、本実施形態において、位置合わせ部32は、照度環境の変化に対応するために、鳥瞰視画像PB,PBt-1の画素値の差を絶対値化し、当該絶対値が所定の閾値th以上であるときに、差分画像PDの画素値を「1」とし、絶対値が所定の閾値th未満であるときに、差分画像PDの画素値を「0」とすることで、図4(b)の右側に示すような差分画像PDのデータを生成することができる。 Further, after the alignment, the alignment unit 32 takes the difference between the bird's-eye view images PB t and PB t−1 and generates data of the difference image PD t . Here, in the present embodiment, the alignment unit 32 converts the pixel value difference between the bird's-eye view images PB t and PB t−1 to an absolute value in order to cope with a change in the illumination environment, and the absolute value is a predetermined value. By setting the pixel value of the difference image PD t to “1” when the threshold value is equal to or greater than the threshold th, and setting the pixel value of the difference image PD t to “0” when the absolute value is less than the predetermined threshold th, Data of the difference image PD t as shown on the right side of FIG. 4B can be generated.
 図3に戻り、立体物検出部33は、図4(b)に示す差分画像PDのデータに基づいて立体物を検出する。この際、立体物検出部33は、実空間上における立体物の移動距離についても算出する。立体物の検出および移動距離の算出にあたり、立体物検出部33は、まず差分波形を生成する。 Returning to FIG. 3, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 detects a three-dimensional object based on the data of the difference image PD t shown in FIG. At this time, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 also calculates the movement distance of the three-dimensional object in the real space. In detecting the three-dimensional object and calculating the movement distance, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 first generates a differential waveform.
 差分波形の生成にあたって立体物検出部33は、差分画像PDにおいて検出領域を設定する。本例の立体物検出装置1は、自車両V1が車線変更する際に接触の可能性がある隣接車両について移動距離を算出することを目的とするものである。このため、本例では、図2に示すように自車両V1の後側方に矩形状の検出領域A1,A2を設定する。なお、このような検出領域A1,A2は、自車両V1に対する相対位置から設定してもよいし、白線の位置を基準に設定してもよい。白線の位置を基準に設定する場合に、立体物検出装置1は、例えば既存の白線認識技術等を利用するとよい。 In generating the difference waveform, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 sets a detection region in the difference image PD t . The three-dimensional object detection device 1 of the present example is intended to calculate a movement distance for an adjacent vehicle that may be contacted when the host vehicle V1 changes lanes. For this reason, in this example, as shown in FIG. 2, rectangular detection areas A1, A2 are set on the rear side of the host vehicle V1. Such detection areas A1, A2 may be set from a relative position with respect to the host vehicle V1, or may be set based on the position of the white line. When setting the position of the white line as a reference, the three-dimensional object detection device 1 may use, for example, an existing white line recognition technique.
 また、立体物検出部33は、図2に示すように、設定した検出領域A1,A2の自車両V1側における辺(走行方向に沿う辺)を接地線L1,L2として認識する。一般に接地線は立体物が地面に接触する線を意味するが、本実施形態では地面に接触する線でなく上記の如くに設定される。なおこの場合であっても、経験上、本実施形態に係る接地線と、本来の隣接車両V2の位置から求められる接地線との差は大きくなり過ぎず、実用上は問題が無い。 Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 recognizes the sides (sides along the traveling direction) of the set detection areas A1 and A2 on the own vehicle V1 side as the ground lines L1 and L2. In general, the ground line means a line in which the three-dimensional object contacts the ground. However, in the present embodiment, the ground line is set as described above, not a line in contact with the ground. Even in this case, from experience, the difference between the ground line according to the present embodiment and the ground line obtained from the position of the original adjacent vehicle V2 is not too large, and there is no problem in practical use.
 図5は、立体物検出部33による差分波形の生成の様子を示す概略図である。図5に示すように、立体物検出部33は、位置合わせ部32で算出した差分画像PD(図4(b)の右図)のうち検出領域A1,A2に相当する部分から、差分波形DWを生成する。この際、立体物検出部33は、視点変換により立体物が倒れ込む方向に沿って、差分波形DWを生成する。なお、図5に示す例では、便宜上検出領域A1のみを用いて説明するが、検出領域A2についても同様の手順で差分波形DWを生成する。 FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram illustrating how the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 generates a differential waveform. As shown in FIG. 5, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 calculates a differential waveform from a portion corresponding to the detection areas A <b> 1 and A <b> 2 in the difference image PD t (right diagram in FIG. 4B) calculated by the alignment unit 32. DW t is generated. At this time, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 generates a differential waveform DW t along the direction in which the three-dimensional object falls by viewpoint conversion. In the example shown in FIG. 5, only the detection area A1 is described for convenience, but the difference waveform DW t is generated for the detection area A2 in the same procedure.
 具体的に説明すると、まず立体物検出部33は、差分画像PDのデータ上において立体物が倒れ込む方向上の線Laを定義する。そして、立体物検出部33は、線La上において所定の差分を示す差分画素DPの数をカウントする。本実施形態では、所定の差分を示す差分画素DPは、差分画像PDの画素値が「0」「1」で表現されており、「1」を示す画素が、差分画素DPとしてカウントされる。 Specifically, first three-dimensional object detection unit 33 defines a line La on the direction the three-dimensional object collapses on data of the difference image PD t. Then, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 counts the number of difference pixels DP indicating a predetermined difference on the line La. In the present embodiment, the difference pixel DP indicating the predetermined difference is expressed by the pixel value of the difference image PD t as “0” and “1”, and the pixel indicating “1” is counted as the difference pixel DP. .
 立体物検出部33は、差分画素DPの数をカウントした後、線Laと接地線L1との交点CPを求める。そして、立体物検出部33は、交点CPとカウント数とを対応付け、交点CPの位置に基づいて横軸位置、すなわち図5右図の上下方向軸における位置を決定するとともに、カウント数から縦軸位置、すなわち図5右図の左右方向軸における位置を決定し、交点CPにおけるカウント数としてプロットする。 The three-dimensional object detection unit 33 counts the number of difference pixels DP and then obtains an intersection point CP between the line La and the ground line L1. Then, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 associates the intersection CP with the count number, determines the horizontal axis position based on the position of the intersection CP, that is, the position on the vertical axis in the right diagram of FIG. The axis position, that is, the position on the right and left axis in the right diagram of FIG. 5 is determined and plotted as the count number at the intersection CP.
 以下同様に、立体物検出部33は、立体物が倒れ込む方向上の線Lb,Lc…を定義して、差分画素DPの数をカウントし、各交点CPの位置に基づいて横軸位置を決定し、カウント数(差分画素DPの数)から縦軸位置を決定しプロットする。立体物検出部33は、上記を順次繰り返して度数分布化することで、図5右図に示すように差分波形DWを生成する。 Similarly, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 defines lines Lb, Lc... In the direction in which the three-dimensional object falls, counts the number of difference pixels DP, and determines the horizontal axis position based on the position of each intersection CP. Then, the vertical axis position is determined from the count number (number of difference pixels DP) and plotted. The three-dimensional object detection unit 33 generates the differential waveform DW t as shown in the right diagram of FIG.
 ここで、差分画像PDのデータ上における差分画素PDは、異なる時刻の画像において変化があった画素であり、言い換えれば立体物が存在した箇所であるといえる。このため、立体物が存在した箇所において、立体物が倒れ込む方向に沿って画素数をカウントして度数分布化することで差分波形DWを生成することとなる。特に、立体物が倒れ込む方向に沿って画素数をカウントすることから、立体物に対して高さ方向の情報から差分波形DWを生成することとなる。 Here, the difference pixel PD on the data of the difference image PD t is a pixel that has changed in the images at different times, in other words, a location where a three-dimensional object exists. For this reason, the difference waveform DW t is generated by counting the number of pixels along the direction in which the three-dimensional object collapses and performing frequency distribution at the location where the three-dimensional object exists. In particular, since the number of pixels is counted along the direction in which the three-dimensional object falls, the differential waveform DW t is generated from the information in the height direction for the three-dimensional object.
 なお、図5左図に示すように、立体物が倒れ込む方向上の線Laと線Lbとは検出領域A1と重複する距離が異なっている。このため、検出領域A1が差分画素DPで満たされているとすると、線Lb上よりも線La上の方が差分画素DPの数が多くなる。このため、立体物検出部33は、差分画素DPのカウント数から縦軸位置を決定する場合に、立体物が倒れ込む方向上の線La,Lbと検出領域A1とが重複する距離に基づいて正規化する。具体例を挙げると、図5左図において線La上の差分画素DPは6つあり、線Lb上の差分画素DPは5つである。このため、図5においてカウント数から縦軸位置を決定するにあたり、立体物検出部33は、カウント数を重複距離で除算するなどして正規化する。これにより、差分波形DWに示すように、立体物が倒れ込む方向上の線La,Lbに対応する差分波形DWの値はほぼ同じとなっている。 As shown in the left diagram of FIG. 5, the line La and the line Lb in the direction in which the three-dimensional object collapses have different distances overlapping the detection area A1. For this reason, if the detection area A1 is filled with the difference pixels DP, the number of difference pixels DP is larger on the line La than on the line Lb. For this reason, when the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 determines the vertical axis position from the count number of the difference pixels DP, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 is normalized based on the distance at which the lines La and Lb in the direction in which the three-dimensional object falls and the detection area A1 overlap. Turn into. As a specific example, in the left diagram of FIG. 5, there are six difference pixels DP on the line La, and there are five difference pixels DP on the line Lb. For this reason, in determining the vertical axis position from the count number in FIG. 5, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 normalizes the count number by dividing it by the overlap distance. Thus, as shown in the difference waveform DW t, the line La on the direction the three-dimensional object collapses, the value of the differential waveform DW t corresponding to Lb is substantially the same.
 差分波形DWの生成後、立体物検出部33は、生成した差分波形DWに基づいて、隣接車線に存在している隣接車両の検出を行う。ここで、図6は、立体物検出部33による隣接車両の検出方法を説明するための図であり、差分波形DWおよび隣接車両を検出するための閾値αの一例を示している。立体物検出部33は、図6に示すように、生成した差分波形DWのピークが、当該差分波形DWのピークの位置に対応する閾値α以上であるか否かを判断する。そして、立体物検出部33は、差分波形DWのピークが所定の閾値α未満である場合には、検出領域A1,A2に隣接車両は存在しないと判断し、一方、差分波形DWのピークが所定の閾値α以上である場合には、検出領域A1,A2に隣接車両が存在すると判断することで、隣接車線に存在する隣接車両を検出する。 After the generation of the difference waveform DW t , the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 detects the adjacent vehicle existing in the adjacent lane based on the generated difference waveform DW t . Here, FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a detection method of the adjacent vehicle by the three-dimensional object detection unit 33, and shows an example of the differential waveform DW t and the threshold value α for detecting the adjacent vehicle. As illustrated in FIG. 6, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 determines whether or not the peak of the generated differential waveform DW t is greater than or equal to a threshold value α corresponding to the peak position of the differential waveform DW t . Then, when the peak of the differential waveform DW t is less than the predetermined threshold value α, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 determines that no adjacent vehicle exists in the detection areas A1 and A2, while the peak of the differential waveform DW t Is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value α, it is determined that there is an adjacent vehicle in the detection areas A1 and A2, thereby detecting the adjacent vehicle existing in the adjacent lane.
 このように、差分波形DWは、所定輝度差を示す画素の分布情報の一態様であり、本実施形態における「画素の分布情報」とは、撮像画像を鳥瞰視画像に視点変換した際における立体物が倒れ込む方向に沿って検出される「輝度差が所定閾値以上の画素」の分布の状態を示す情報と位置付けることができる。つまり、立体物検出部33は、視点変換部31により得られた鳥瞰視画像上で、鳥瞰視画像に視点変換した際に立体物が倒れ込む方向において、輝度差が所定閾値th以上の画素の分布情報を差分波形DWとして検出し、さらに、立体物が倒れこむ方向における画素の分布の度合い(差分波形DWにおける差分画素DPのカウント数)が閾値α以上である場合に、差分波形DWに基づいて、立体物を検出する。 As described above, the differential waveform DW t is an aspect of pixel distribution information indicating a predetermined luminance difference, and the “pixel distribution information” in the present embodiment is obtained when the captured image is converted into a bird's-eye view image. It can be positioned as information indicating the distribution state of “pixels having a luminance difference equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold” detected along the direction in which the three-dimensional object falls. In other words, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 distributes pixels whose luminance difference is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold th in the direction in which the three-dimensional object falls when the viewpoint is converted into the bird's-eye view image on the bird's-eye view image obtained by the viewpoint conversion unit 31. When the information is detected as the difference waveform DW t and the degree of pixel distribution in the direction in which the three-dimensional object collapses (the count number of the difference pixels DP in the difference waveform DW t ) is equal to or greater than the threshold value α, the difference waveform DW t Based on this, a three-dimensional object is detected.
 続いて、隣接車両を検出するための閾値αの設定方法について説明する。 Subsequently, a method for setting the threshold value α for detecting the adjacent vehicle will be described.
 閾値αは、図3に示す検出基準設定部35により設定される。本実施形態において、検出基準設定部35は、後述するように、図3に示す確信度判定部34により検出された確信度に基づいて、カメラ10からの後方距離に応じて設定した第1の閾値α、および、カメラ10と光源との位置関係に応じて設定された第2の閾値αのいずれか一方を、差分波形DWに基づいて隣接車両を検出するための閾値αとして設定する。 The threshold value α is set by the detection reference setting unit 35 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the detection criterion setting unit 35 is set according to the rear distance from the camera 10 based on the certainty factor detected by the certainty factor determination unit 34 shown in FIG. One of the threshold value α 1 and the second threshold value α 2 set according to the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source is set as a threshold value α for detecting the adjacent vehicle based on the differential waveform DW t. To do.
 確信度判定部34は、自車両後側方において光源が検出された場合に、検出された光源が、自車両後側方の隣隣接車線(自車線の2車線隣の車線)を走行する他車両(以下、隣隣接車両という)のヘッドライトであることの確からしさを確信度として判定する。以下に、確信度判定部34による確信度の判定方法について説明する。なお、本実施形態では、後述するように、光源の検出は検出基準設定部35により行われる。 When the light source is detected on the rear side of the host vehicle, the certainty factor determination unit 34 travels in the adjacent adjacent lane on the rear side of the host vehicle (the lane adjacent to the second lane of the host vehicle). The certainty of being a headlight of a vehicle (hereinafter referred to as an adjacent vehicle) is determined as a certainty factor. Below, the determination method of the certainty factor by the certainty factor determination part 34 is demonstrated. In this embodiment, as will be described later, detection of the light source is performed by the detection reference setting unit 35.
 本実施形態において、確信度判定部34は、検出した光源の数、光源の位置、および、光源の状態の時間変化に基づいて、検出した光源が、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである確信度を判定する。 In the present embodiment, the certainty factor determination unit 34 determines the certainty factor that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle based on the number of detected light sources, the position of the light source, and the temporal change in the state of the light source. judge.
 たとえば、確信度判定部34は、検出領域A1,A2内で検出された光源の数が多い場合には、検出した光源は、たとえば街灯や電飾された看板などであり、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである可能性は低いもの判断し、検出した光源が隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである確信度を低く判定する。 For example, when the number of light sources detected in the detection areas A1 and A2 is large, the certainty factor determination unit 34 is, for example, a street lamp or an illuminated signboard, and the head of the adjacent vehicle The possibility that the light is low is determined, and the certainty that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is determined to be low.
 また、確信度判定部34は、光源の位置、すなわち、光源の高さ(光源の鉛直方向における位置)、光源の車幅方向における位置、および光源の自車両進行方向における位置に基づいて、検出した光源が、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである確信度を判定する。たとえば、確信度判定部34は、光源の高さが高い場合は、検出した光源は街灯に起因する可能性が高いものと判断し、検出した光源が隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである確信度を低く判定する。また、確信度判定部34は、光源の車幅方向における位置が、自車両から遠くなるほど、検出した光源は、隣接車線よりも自車両から遠い隣隣接車線に存在する隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである可能性が高いものと判断し、検出した光源が隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである確信度を高く判定する。さらに、確信度判定部34は、光源の自車両進行方向における位置が自車両から遠いほど、検出した光源は、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである可能性が低いものと判断し、検出した光源が隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである確信度を低く判定する。 In addition, the certainty determination unit 34 detects based on the position of the light source, that is, the height of the light source (the position of the light source in the vertical direction), the position of the light source in the vehicle width direction, and the position of the light source in the traveling direction of the host vehicle. The certainty factor that the light source that has been used is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is determined. For example, when the height of the light source is high, the certainty factor determination unit 34 determines that the detected light source is highly likely to be caused by a streetlight, and determines the certainty factor that the detected light source is a headlight of an adjacent vehicle. Judge low. In addition, the certainty factor determination unit 34 uses the headlight of the adjacent vehicle that is located in the adjacent lane farther from the own vehicle than the adjacent lane as the position of the light source in the vehicle width direction is farther from the own vehicle. It is determined that there is a high possibility, and the certainty that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is determined to be high. Further, the certainty determination unit 34 determines that the detected light source is less likely to be a headlight of an adjacent vehicle as the position of the light source in the traveling direction of the host vehicle is farther from the host vehicle. The certainty that is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is determined low.
 さらに、確信度判定部34は、光源の状態の時間変化に基づいて、検出した光源が、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである確信度を判定する。たとえば、確信度判定部34は、検出した光源の大きさの時間変化が小さい場合には、検出した光源は、隣接車線よりも自車両から遠い隣隣接車線を走行する隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである可能性が高いものと判断し、検出した光源が、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである確信度を高く判定する。また、たとえば、確信度判定部34は、検出した光源の位置の時間変化が小さい場合や、検出した光源の輝度の時間変化が小さい場合にも、検出した光源は、隣接車線よりも自車両から遠い隣隣接車線を走行する隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである可能性が高いものと判断し、検出した光源が隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである確信度を高く判定する。 Furthermore, the certainty factor determination unit 34 determines the certainty factor that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle based on the temporal change in the state of the light source. For example, when the temporal change in the size of the detected light source is small, the certainty factor determination unit 34 uses a headlight of an adjacent vehicle that travels in an adjacent lane farther from the vehicle than the adjacent lane. It is determined that there is a high possibility, and the certainty factor that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is determined to be high. Further, for example, the certainty factor determination unit 34 detects the detected light source from the own vehicle rather than the adjacent lane even when the temporal change in the position of the detected light source is small or the temporal change in the luminance of the detected light source is small. It is determined that there is a high possibility that it is a headlight of an adjacent vehicle that travels in a distant adjacent lane, and the certainty that the detected light source is a headlight of the adjacent vehicle is determined to be high.
 そして、確信度判定部34は、これら光源の数、光源の位置、および光源の状態の時間変化に基づいて、検出した光源が隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである確信度を総合的に判定する。このように、光源の数、光源の位置、および光源の状態の時間変化を総合的に判断することで、検出した光源が隣隣接車両のヘッドライトに起因するものであるか否かを適切に判定することができる。なお、確信度判定部34は、確信度を判定する際に、検出した光源の大きさを加味する構成としてもよい。たとえば、確信度判定部34は、検出した光源の大きさが、隣隣接車両の一般的なヘッドライトの大きさから大きく外れる場合には、確信度を低く判定する構成とすることができる。 Then, the certainty factor determination unit 34 comprehensively determines the certainty factor that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle based on the number of light sources, the position of the light sources, and the temporal change of the light source state. In this way, by comprehensively determining the number of light sources, the positions of the light sources, and the temporal changes in the state of the light sources, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the detected light sources are caused by the headlights of adjacent vehicles. Can be determined. The certainty factor determination unit 34 may be configured to take into account the size of the detected light source when determining the certainty factor. For example, the certainty factor determination unit 34 can be configured to determine the certainty factor low when the size of the detected light source greatly deviates from the size of a general headlight of an adjacent vehicle adjacent to the vehicle.
 そして、検出基準設定部35は、確信度判定部34により判定された確信度が所定値以上であるか否かを判断し、確信度が所定値未満である場合には、後述するカメラ10からの後方距離に応じて設定した第1の閾値αを、差分波形DWに基づいて隣接車両を検出するための閾値αとして設定し、一方、確信度が所定値以上である場合には、後述するカメラ10と光源との位置関係に応じて設定された第2の閾値αを、差分波形DWに基づいて隣接車両を検出するための閾値αとして設定する。ここで、まず、カメラ10からの後方距離に応じた第1の閾値αの設定方法について説明する。 Then, the detection reference setting unit 35 determines whether or not the certainty level determined by the certainty level determination unit 34 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The first threshold value α 1 set according to the rear distance is set as the threshold value α for detecting the adjacent vehicle based on the differential waveform DW t . On the other hand, when the certainty factor is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, A second threshold value α 2 set according to the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source, which will be described later, is set as a threshold value α for detecting an adjacent vehicle based on the differential waveform DW t . Here, first, a method of setting the first threshold value α 1 according to the rear distance from the camera 10 will be described.
 検出基準設定部35は、図5左図に示す立体物が倒れ込む方向上の各線La,Lb,Lc…に対応する検出領域A1,A2内の位置(以下、検出領域A1,A2内の検出位置という)ごとに、検出領域A1,A2内の検出位置における輝度(たとえば、図5左図に示す立体物が倒れ込む方向上の各線La,Lb,Lc…上の差分画素DPの平均輝度など)、および、カメラ10からの後方距離に応じて、第1の閾値αを設定する。ここで、図7は、検出領域A1,A2内の検出位置における輝度と第1の閾値αとの関係の一例を示すグラフであり、図8は、カメラ10からの後方距離と第1の閾値αとの関係を説明するための図である。 The detection reference setting unit 35 detects positions in the detection areas A1, A2 corresponding to the lines La, Lb, Lc... In the direction in which the three-dimensional object shown in the left diagram of FIG. 5 falls (hereinafter, detection positions in the detection areas A1, A2). For each of the detection positions in the detection areas A1, A2 (for example, the average luminance of the difference pixels DP on the lines La, Lb, Lc... In the direction in which the three-dimensional object shown in the left diagram of FIG. And according to the back distance from the camera 10, 1st threshold value (alpha) 1 is set. Here, FIG. 7 is a graph showing an example of the relationship between 1 brightness and the first threshold value α at the detection position of the detection area A1, A2, 8, from the camera 10 rear distance and the first It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship with threshold value (alpha) 1 .
 具体的には、検出基準設定部35は、図7に示すように、検出領域A1,A2内の検出位置における輝度が高いほど、当該検出位置に対応する第1の閾値αを高い値に設定する。これにより、たとえば、輝度の高い隣隣接車両(自車線の2車線隣の隣隣接車線に存在する車両)のヘッドライトの光が隣接車線に照射された場合でも、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトの光に基づく差分波形DWのピークが第1の閾値α未満となり、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトの光の影響を排除することができるため、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトの光の像を、隣接車両として誤検出してしまうことを有効に防止することができる。 Specifically, the detection reference setting unit 35, as shown in FIG. 7, the higher the brightness at the detection position of the detection area A1, A2, the first threshold value alpha 1 corresponding to the detected position to a higher value Set. Thereby, for example, even when the headlight of the adjacent vehicle with high brightness (the vehicle existing in the adjacent adjacent lane adjacent to the second lane of the own lane) is irradiated on the adjacent lane, the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle Since the peak of the difference waveform DW t based on the value becomes less than the first threshold value α 1 and the influence of the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle adjacent to the vehicle can be eliminated, Can be effectively prevented from being erroneously detected.
 さらに、検出基準設定部35は、カメラ10からの後方距離に応じて設定されている第1の閾値αのゲインに基づいて、検出領域A1,A2内の検出位置における輝度に応じて設定された第1の閾値αを変更する。たとえば、検出基準設定部35は、図8左図に示すように、カメラ10からの後方距離に応じて、検出領域A1,A2を3つの領域に分割する。図8左図に示す例では、検出基準設定部35は、検出領域A1,A2を、カメラ10からの後方距離が距離D1未満の領域R1と、カメラ10からの後方距離が距離D1以上であり、かつ、距離D2未満の領域R2と、カメラ10からの後方距離が距離D2以上であり、かつ、距離D3未満の領域R3の3つの領域に分割する。なお、図8については検出領域A1のみを図示して説明するが、検出領域A2についても同様に第1の閾値αのゲインが設定されている。 Further, the detection reference setting unit 35, based on the first threshold value alpha 1 of the gain that is set in accordance with the rearward distance from the camera 10 is set in accordance with the luminance at the detection position of the detection area A1, A2 to the change the first threshold value alpha 1 was. For example, the detection reference setting unit 35 divides the detection areas A1 and A2 into three areas according to the rear distance from the camera 10, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. In the example shown in the left diagram of FIG. 8, the detection reference setting unit 35 includes the detection areas A1 and A2 in a region R1 where the rear distance from the camera 10 is less than the distance D1, and the rear distance from the camera 10 is the distance D1 or more. The region R2 is divided into three regions: a region R2 less than the distance D2 and a region R3 whose rear distance from the camera 10 is equal to or greater than the distance D2 and less than the distance D3. Note that FIG. 8 is illustrated and described only the detection area A1, the first gain threshold alpha 1 Similarly, the detection area A2 is set.
 図8右図に示すように、第1の閾値αのゲインは、カメラ10からの後方距離に応じて設定されている。たとえば、検出領域A1のうち、カメラ10からの後方距離が距離D1以上であり、かつ、距離D2未満である領域R2では、第1の閾値αのゲインは一定の値に設定されている。これに対して、検出領域A1のうち、カメラ10からの後方距離が距離D1未満の領域R1では、領域R2で設定されている第1の閾値αよりも高いゲインとなっており、また、カメラ10からの後方距離が小さいほど(自車両に近いほど)、第1の閾値αのゲインが高くなっている。さらに、検出領域A1のうち、カメラ10からの後方距離が距離D2以上の領域R3でも、領域R2で設定されている第1の閾値αよりも高いゲインとなっており、また、カメラ10からの後方距離が大きいほど(自車両から遠いほど)、第1の閾値αのゲインが高くなっている。 As shown in FIG. 8 right figure, the first threshold value alpha 1 of the gain is set in accordance with the rearward distance from the camera 10. For example, among the detection area A1, the rear distance from the camera 10 is not less distance D1 above, and, in the region is less than the distance D2 R2, the first threshold value alpha 1 of the gain is set to a constant value. In contrast, among the detection area A1, in the region R1 rear distance is less than the distance D1 from the camera 10, has a higher gain than the first threshold value alpha 1 that is set in the region R2, also, more rearward distance from the camera 10 is small (closer to the host vehicle), the first gain threshold alpha 1 is higher. Furthermore, among the detection area A1, the rear distance from the camera 10 even distance D2 or more regions R3, has a higher gain than the first threshold value alpha 1 that is set in the region R2, also from the camera 10 the larger the rearward distance (farther from the vehicle), the first gain threshold alpha 1 is higher.
 ここで、図9Aは、検出領域A2内の領域R2で隣隣接車両V3のヘッドライトが検出される場面を示している。図9Aに示すように、検出領域A2のうち領域R2においては、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトの光が隣隣接車両からカメラ10に直線的に照射され、カメラ10に入射されるヘッドライトの光量は多くなるため、領域R2における輝度は、検出領域A2の他の領域R1,R2と比べて高くなる。そのため、図8右図に示すように、検出領域A1,A2内の領域R2において、第1の閾値αのゲインを、検出領域A1,A2内の他の領域R1,R3と比べて低い値とした場合でも、検出基準設定部35は、図7に示すように、領域R2における高い輝度に応じて閾値αを高く設定することができ、これにより、領域R2において、隣隣接車両V3のヘッドライトの光を、隣接車両として誤検出してしまうことを有効に防止することができる。なお、図9Aについては検出領域A2のみを図示して説明するが、検出領域A1についても同様である(後述する図9B、図9Cにおいても同じ。)。 Here, FIG. 9A shows a scene in which the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 is detected in the region R2 in the detection region A2. As shown in FIG. 9A, in the region R2 of the detection region A2, the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is irradiated linearly from the adjacent vehicle to the camera 10, and the light amount of the headlight incident on the camera 10 is Therefore, the luminance in the region R2 is higher than the other regions R1 and R2 in the detection region A2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8 right figure, in the region R2 in the detection areas A1, A2, the first gain threshold alpha 1, other regions R1, R3 as compared to a low value in the detection areas A1, A2 Even in this case, the detection reference setting unit 35 can set the threshold value α high in accordance with the high luminance in the region R2, as shown in FIG. 7, and thereby the head of the adjacent vehicle V3 in the region R2 can be set. It is possible to effectively prevent light from being erroneously detected as an adjacent vehicle. Note that FIG. 9A is illustrated with only the detection region A2, but the same applies to the detection region A1 (the same applies to FIGS. 9B and 9C described later).
 また、図9Bは、検出領域A2内の領域R1で隣隣接車両V3のヘッドライトが検出される場面を示している。図9Bに示すように、自車両に近い領域R1で隣隣接車両V3のヘッドライトが検出された場合、隣隣接車両V3から照射されたヘッドライトの光のうち、自車両V1が存在する方向に照射された一部の光のみが、カメラ10に入射する。そのため、検出領域A1,A2のうち自車両に近い領域R1では、通常、検出領域A1,A2の領域R2と比べて、カメラ10に入射されるヘッドライトの光量が少なく、領域R1の輝度が低くなる。そのため、図7に示すように、第1の閾値αを輝度に応じて変更するだけでは、領域R1に照射された隣隣接車両V3のヘッドライトの光を、隣接車両として誤検出してしまう場合がある。特に、領域R1では、カメラ10からの後方距離が小さいほど(自車両に近いほど)、隣隣接車両V3から照射されるヘッドライトの光は弱くなる。これに対して、本実施形態では、図8右図に示すように、領域R1においては、領域R2と比べて、第1の閾値αのゲインが高く設定されているとともに、カメラ10からの後方距離が小さいほど(自車両に近いほど)、第1の閾値αのゲインが高く設定されている。そのため、本実施形態において、検出基準設定部35は、領域R1で検出された隣隣接車両V3のヘッドライトの輝度が低い場合でも、閾値αを高い値に変更することができ、これにより、領域R1で検出された隣隣接車両V3のヘッドライトの輝度が低い場合でも、隣隣接車両V3のヘッドライトの光を、隣接車両V2として誤検出してしまうことを有効に防止することができる。 FIG. 9B shows a scene in which the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 is detected in the region R1 within the detection region A2. As shown in FIG. 9B, when the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 is detected in the region R1 close to the host vehicle, the headlight light emitted from the adjacent vehicle V3 is in the direction in which the host vehicle V1 exists. Only a part of the irradiated light enters the camera 10. For this reason, in the region R1 close to the host vehicle in the detection regions A1 and A2, the amount of headlight incident on the camera 10 is usually smaller and the luminance of the region R1 is lower than the region R2 in the detection regions A1 and A2. Become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, only changed according the first threshold alpha 1 to the luminance, the light of headlights next adjacent vehicle V3 irradiated to the region R1, it is erroneously detected as the adjacent vehicle There is a case. In particular, in the region R1, as the rear distance from the camera 10 is smaller (closer to the host vehicle), the light of the headlight emitted from the adjacent vehicle V3 becomes weaker. In contrast, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8 right figure, in the region R1, as compared to the area R2, together with the first gain threshold alpha 1 is set higher, from the camera 10 more rear distance is smaller (closer to the host vehicle), the first gain threshold alpha 1 is set high. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection reference setting unit 35 can change the threshold value α to a high value even when the brightness of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 detected in the region R1 is low. Even when the brightness of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 detected at R1 is low, it is possible to effectively prevent the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 from being erroneously detected as the adjacent vehicle V2.
 また、図9Cは、検出領域A2内の領域R3で隣隣接車両V3のヘッドライトが検出される場面を示している。図9Cに示すように、自車両から遠い領域R3には、検出領域A1,A2よりも後方に位置する複数の車両(たとえば、図9Cに示す隣隣接車両V3や、当該隣隣接車両V3よりもさらに後方に存在する車両など)から、様々な輝度の光が照射される。すなわち、領域R3で検出される隣隣接車両V3のヘッドライトの光は、領域R2と比べて輝度が低い場合もあり、このような場合に、図7に示すように、第1の閾値αを輝度に応じて変更するだけでは、領域R3に照射された隣隣接車両V3のヘッドライトの光の像を、隣接車両として誤検出してしまう場合がある。特に、領域R3では、カメラ10からの後方距離が大きいほど(自車両から遠いほど)、照射されるヘッドライトの光の輝度がばらつく傾向にあり、より輝度の低い光が照射される可能性がある。これに対して、本実施形態では、図8右図に示すように、領域R3においては、領域R1と同様に、領域R2と比べて第1の閾値αのゲインが高く設定されているとともに、カメラ10からの後方距離が大きいほど(自車両から遠いほど)、第1の閾値αのゲインが高く設定されている。そのため、本実施形態において、検出基準設定部35は、領域R3で検出された隣隣接車両V3のヘッドライトの輝度が低い場合でも、第1の閾値αを高い値に変更することができ、これにより、領域R3で検出された隣隣接車両V3のヘッドライトの輝度が低い場合でも、隣隣接車両V3のヘッドライトの光を、隣接車両V2として誤検出してしまうことを有効に防止することができる。 FIG. 9C shows a scene in which the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 is detected in the region R3 in the detection region A2. As shown in FIG. 9C, a region R3 far from the host vehicle has a plurality of vehicles positioned behind the detection regions A1 and A2 (for example, the adjacent vehicle V3 shown in FIG. 9C and the adjacent vehicle V3. Furthermore, light of various luminances is emitted from a vehicle or the like existing behind. That is, the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 detected in the region R3 may be lower in brightness than the region R2, and in such a case, as shown in FIG. 7, the first threshold value α 1 May be erroneously detected as an adjacent vehicle if the image of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 irradiated to the region R3 is simply changed according to the luminance. In particular, in the region R3, as the rear distance from the camera 10 increases (the farther from the host vehicle), the luminance of the light of the headlight to be irradiated tends to vary, and there is a possibility that light with lower luminance is irradiated. is there. In contrast, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8 right figure, in the area R3, similarly to the region R1, together with the first gain threshold alpha 1 than a region R2 is set to be higher , more rearward distance from the camera 10 is larger (farther from the vehicle), the first gain threshold alpha 1 is set high. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection reference setting unit 35 can be changed even if the brightness of the headlight of the next adjacent vehicle V3 detected in region R3 is low, the first threshold value alpha 1 to a higher value, Thereby, even when the brightness of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 detected in the region R3 is low, it is effectively prevented that the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 is erroneously detected as the adjacent vehicle V2. Can do.
 このように、検出基準設定部35は、図7に示すように、検出領域A1,A2内の検出位置における輝度に応じて第1の閾値αを設定するとともに、設定した第1の閾値αのゲインを、図8に示すように、カメラ10からの後方距離に応じて変更することで、図6に示すように、検出領域A1,A2内の各検出位置に対応する第1の閾値αを設定する。たとえば、検出基準設定部35は、図7を参照して、図5左図に示す線La上の差分画素DPの輝度に応じて第1の閾値αを設定し、さらに、図8右図に示す第1の閾値αのゲインのうち、線Laの交点CPの位置における第1の閾値αのゲインで、設定した閾値第1の閾値αを変更することで、線Laに対応する位置の第1の閾値αを算出する。同様に、検出基準設定部35は、線Lb,Lc…に対応する位置の第1の閾値αを算出することで、図6に示すように、検出領域A1,A2内の各検出位置に対応する第1の閾値αを設定する。 Thus, the detection reference setting unit 35, as shown in FIG. 7, sets a first threshold value alpha 1 according to the luminance at the detection position of the detection area A1, A2, the first threshold set alpha The first threshold corresponding to each detection position in the detection areas A1 and A2 as shown in FIG. 6 by changing the gain of 1 according to the rear distance from the camera 10 as shown in FIG. Set α 1 . For example, referring to FIG. 7, the detection reference setting unit 35 sets the first threshold value α 1 according to the luminance of the difference pixel DP on the line La shown in the left diagram of FIG. of the first threshold value alpha 1 of the gain shown in, the first threshold value alpha 1 of the gain at the intersections CP line La, by changing the threshold value alpha 1 threshold first set, corresponding to line La calculating a first threshold value alpha 1 in the position. Similarly, the detection reference setting unit 35, the line Lb, by calculating the first threshold value alpha 1 at the position corresponding to Lc ..., as shown in FIG. 6, the respective detection positions in the detection areas A1, A2 setting the first threshold value alpha 1 corresponding.
 なお、検出基準設定部35は、隣接車線に照射された隣隣接車両V3のヘッドライトの光の像を、隣接車両として誤検出してしまうことを防止できるように、閾値αの設定を行うものである。そのため、本実施形態では、カメラ10からの後方距離に応じて第1の閾値αを変更する処理を、隣隣接車両V3がヘッドライトを点灯する条件(たとえば、夜間)のみ行う構成としてもよい。なお、検出基準設定部35は、たとえば、カメラ10により撮像した画像の輝度が所定値以下である場合に、隣隣接車両V3がヘッドライトを点灯する条件(たとえば、夜間)であると判断することができる。 The detection reference setting unit 35 sets a threshold value α so as to prevent the headlight light image of the adjacent vehicle V3 irradiated on the adjacent lane from being erroneously detected as an adjacent vehicle. It is. Therefore, in this embodiment, the first threshold value alpha 1 for changing the processing depending on the rearward distance from the camera 10, the conditions next adjacent vehicle V3 is headlights (e.g., at night) may be performed only . For example, when the luminance of the image captured by the camera 10 is equal to or lower than a predetermined value, the detection reference setting unit 35 determines that the adjacent adjacent vehicle V3 is in a condition for lighting the headlight (for example, at night). Can do.
 次に、カメラ10と光源との位置関係に応じた第2の閾値αの設定方法について説明する。本実施形態において、検出基準設定部35は、図10に示すように、検出領域A1,A2内の検出位置における輝度と、所定の閾値α’との関係を示した第1の閾値マップ、および、図11に示すように、検出領域A1,A2内の検出位置における輝度と、所定の閾値α”との関係を示した第2の閾値マップを備えている。図10に示す第1の閾値マップは、隣接車両を検出する際に、隣接車両の特徴的な部分であるタイヤホイールを検出しやすいように、輝度が比較的低い場合には閾値α’が比較的低い値となるように設定されている。一方、図11に示す第2の閾値マップは、たとえば、検出領域A1,A2内において隣隣接車両(自車線の2車線隣の隣隣接車線に存在する車両)のヘッドライトの光が検出された場合でも、検出されたヘッドライト周辺において、隣接車両の誤検出が生じないように、輝度が比較的低い場合でも閾値α”が比較的高い値となるように設定されている。具体的には、図10に示す第1の閾値マップに規定されている閾値閾値α’と比較して、図11に示す第2の閾値マップに規定されている閾値α”は、輝度が低い場合でも、所定値S以下とならないように設定されている。 Next, the second threshold value alpha 2 setting method in accordance with the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the detection reference setting unit 35 is a first threshold map showing the relationship between the luminance at the detection positions in the detection areas A1 and A2 and the predetermined threshold α 2 ′. As shown in FIG. 11, a second threshold map showing the relationship between the luminance at the detection positions in the detection areas A1 and A2 and the predetermined threshold α 2 ″ is provided. The first threshold shown in FIG. In the threshold value map, when the adjacent vehicle is detected, the threshold value α 2 ′ is relatively low when the brightness is relatively low so that the tire wheel which is a characteristic part of the adjacent vehicle is easily detected. On the other hand, the second threshold map shown in Fig. 11 is, for example, the head of an adjacent vehicle (a vehicle existing in the adjacent adjacent lane adjacent to the two lanes in the own lane) in the detection areas A1 and A2. Detect even if light is detected In headlights around that, so as not to cause erroneous detection of the adjacent vehicle, is set to be a relatively high value threshold alpha 2 "even when the luminance is relatively low. Specifically, compared to the threshold the threshold alpha 2 'as defined in the first threshold value map shown in FIG. 10, a second threshold value alpha 2 ", which is defined in the threshold map of shown in FIG. 11, luminance even if low, is set so as not to be below a predetermined value S t.
 そして、検出基準設定部35は、検出領域A1,A2内の検出位置における輝度に応じて図10に示す第1の閾値マップから得られた閾値α’と、検出領域A1,A2内の検出位置における輝度に応じて図11に示す第2の閾値マップから得られた閾値α”とを用いて、下記数式1に従って、検出領域内A1,A2内の検出位置において、隣接車両を検出するための第2の閾値αを算出する。
[数1]
 第2の閾値α={(1-wt)・第1の閾値マップから得られた閾値α’)+(wt・第2の閾値マップから得られた閾値α”)
なお、上記式1中、wtは、第2の閾値マップ(ヘッドライト周辺での誤検出の防止を重視したマップ)から得られた閾値α”の重みであり、この重みwtは、図12に示す制御マップに基づいて決定される。
Then, the detection reference setting unit 35 detects the threshold value α 2 ′ obtained from the first threshold map shown in FIG. 10 according to the luminance at the detection position in the detection regions A1 and A2, and the detection in the detection regions A1 and A2. Using the threshold value α 2 ″ obtained from the second threshold map shown in FIG. 11 in accordance with the luminance at the position, the adjacent vehicle is detected at the detection positions in the detection areas A1 and A2 according to the following formula 1. calculating a second threshold value alpha 2 for.
[Equation 1]
Second threshold value α 2 = {(1-wt) · threshold value α 2 ′ obtained from the first threshold map) + (wt · threshold value α 2 ″ obtained from the second threshold map)
In the above equation 1, wt is a weight of the threshold α 2 ″ obtained from the second threshold map (a map that emphasizes prevention of erroneous detection around the headlight), and this weight wt is shown in FIG. It is determined based on the control map shown in FIG.
 ここで、図12は、第2の閾値マップから得られる閾値α”の重みwtを規定した制御マップの一例である。なお、図12に示す制御マップでは、縦軸に、第2の閾値マップから得られる閾値α”の重みwtを示し、横軸に、検出位置の自車両進行方向における位置を示している。図12に示す制御マップでは、後述する基準位置Pにおいて、重みwtが最大の「1」となっている。そのため、上記式1に従って第2の閾値αを算出した場合に、基準位置Pにおける第2の閾値αは、ヘッドライト周辺での誤検出の防止を重視した第2の閾値マップから得られる閾値α”と等しくなる。また、図12に示す制御マップでは、基準位置P付近においても重みwtが「1」に近い値となっている。そのため、上記式1に従って第2の閾値αを算出した場合、基準位置P付近における第2の閾値αは、第2の閾値マップから得られる閾値α”に近い値となる。 Here, FIG. 12 is an example of a control map that defines the weight wt of the threshold value α 2 ″ obtained from the second threshold map. In the control map shown in FIG. 12, the vertical axis represents the second threshold value. The weight α of the threshold value α 2 ″ obtained from the map is shown, and the position of the detected position in the traveling direction of the host vehicle is shown on the horizontal axis. In the control map shown in FIG. 12, the reference position P O to be described later, weight wt is "1" up. Therefore, when calculating the second threshold value alpha 2 according to the above equation 1, the second threshold value alpha 2 at the reference position P O is obtained from the second threshold value map that emphasizes prevention of erroneous detection at around headlights equal to the threshold value alpha 2 "to be. Further, in the control map shown in FIG. 12, the weight wt also in the vicinity of the reference position P O is a value close to" 1 ". Therefore, when calculating the second threshold value alpha 2 according to the above equation 1, the second threshold value alpha 2 in the vicinity of the reference position P O is a value close to the threshold alpha 2 "obtained from the second threshold value map.
 また、図12に示す制御マップでは、基準位置Pの後方において、基準位置Pの前方と比べて、基準位置Pから少し離れた位置で重みwtが「0」となっている。そのため、上記式1に従って第2の閾値αを算出した場合に、基準位置Pの後方における第2の閾値αは、隣接車両のタイヤホイールを検出しやすい第1の閾値マップから得られる閾値α’と等しくなる。反対に、基準位置Pの前方においては、第2の閾値マップから得られる閾値α”の重みwtが高い値で推移している。そのため、上記式1に従って第2の閾値αを算出した場合に、基準位置Pの前方においては、基準位置Pの後方と比較して、ヘッドライト周辺での誤検出の防止を重視した閾値α”が算出されることとなる。 In the control map shown in FIG. 12, the weight wt is “0” at a position slightly behind the reference position P O behind the reference position P O compared to the front of the reference position P O. Therefore, when calculating the second threshold value alpha 2 according to the above equation 1, the reference position P second threshold alpha 2 in the rear of O is obtained from the first threshold value map easily detect the tire wheel of the adjacent vehicle It becomes equal to the threshold value α 2 ′. On the contrary, in front of the reference position PO , the weight wt of the threshold value α 2 ″ obtained from the second threshold map changes with a high value. Therefore, the second threshold value α 2 is calculated according to the above equation 1. when, in front of the reference position P O, as compared to the rear reference position P O, so that the threshold value alpha 2 "with an emphasis on preventing the false detection of around headlights is calculated.
 さらに、本実施形態において、検出基準設定部35は、図12に示す制御マップを用いて、隣接車両を検出するための第2の閾値αを算出する前に、図12に示す制御マップを、カメラ10と光源との位置関係に応じて調整する。以下に、図13を参照して、図12に示す制御マップの調整方法について説明する。ここで、図13は、図12に示す制御マップの調整方法を説明するための図である。 Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the detection reference setting unit 35 uses the control map shown in FIG. 12 before calculating the second threshold value α 2 for detecting the adjacent vehicle. The adjustment is made according to the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source. The control map adjustment method shown in FIG. 12 will be described below with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a method of adjusting the control map shown in FIG.
 すなわち、検出基準設計部35は、図13(A)右図に示すように、まず、カメラ10により撮像された撮像画像から、隣隣接車両V3のヘッドライトなどの光源を検出する。そして、検出基準設定部35は、検出した光源の重心位置を検出し、光源の重心位置と、カメラ10の中心位置とを通る直線Lcを設定する。さらに、検出基準設定部35は、直線Lcと、検出領域A2の隣隣接車線側における辺(走行方向に沿う辺)L2’との交点Oを算出する。なお、検出基準設定部35による光源の検出方法については後述する。 That is, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 13A, the detection reference design unit 35 first detects a light source such as a headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 from the captured image captured by the camera 10. Then, the detection reference setting unit 35 detects the position of the center of gravity of the detected light source, and sets a straight line Lc passing through the position of the center of gravity of the light source and the center position of the camera 10. Further, the detection reference setting unit 35 calculates an intersection O between the straight line Lc and a side (side along the traveling direction) L2 'on the adjacent adjacent lane side of the detection area A2. A method of detecting the light source by the detection reference setting unit 35 will be described later.
 そして、検出基準設定部35は、図13(A)左図に示すように、交点Oと、図12に示す制御マップの基準位置Pとが一致するように、図12に示す制御マップの調整を行う。ここで、図13(B)は、図13(A)に示す場面から、隣隣接車両V3が自車両V1に近接した場面を例示している。図13(B)に示す場面では、隣隣接車両V3が自車両V1に近接しているため、直線Lcと検出領域A2の線L2’との交点Oは、図13(A)に示す交点Oよりも、前方(Y軸負方向)に移動している。そのため、図13(B)左図に示すように、検出基準設定部35により、図13(B)右図に示す交点Oの位置と、図12に示す制御マップの基準位置Pとが一致するように、図12に示す制御マップを調整することで、図13(B)左図に示すように、図12に示す制御マップは、図13(A)左図に示す制御マップと比べて、全体的に前方(Y軸負方向)にシフトされ、これにより、光源の位置と、図12に示す制御マップの基準位置Pとが対応することとなる。 Then, the detection reference setting unit 35, as shown in FIG. 13 (A) left, and intersection point O, so that the reference position P O of the control map shown in FIG. 12 coincide, the control map shown in FIG. 12 Make adjustments. Here, FIG. 13B illustrates a scene in which the adjacent vehicle V3 is close to the host vehicle V1 from the scene illustrated in FIG. In the scene shown in FIG. 13B, since the adjacent vehicle V3 is close to the host vehicle V1, the intersection O between the straight line Lc and the line L2 ′ of the detection area A2 is the intersection O shown in FIG. Rather than forward (Y-axis negative direction). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13 (B) left, the detection reference setting unit 35, the position of the intersection point O shown in FIG. 13 (B) right figure, and the reference position P O of the control map shown in FIG. 12 coincide Thus, by adjusting the control map shown in FIG. 12, the control map shown in FIG. 12 is compared with the control map shown in the left figure of FIG. are generally shifted forward (Y-axis negative direction), thereby, the position of the light source, and the reference position P O of the control map shown in FIG. 12 so that the corresponding.
 このように、光源の位置と図12に示す制御マップの基準位置Pとを対応させることで、光源よりも前方の領域Rf(すなわち、自車両の進行方向をY方向、車幅方向をX方向としたXY平面において、Y方向におけるカメラ10の位置を0、カメラ10よりも後方をY>0とし、直線LcをY=kXで示した場合に、Y<kXとなる領域)において、第2の閾値マップから得られる閾値”の重みwtが大きくすることができる。そのため、上記式1に従って第2の閾値αを算出した場合に、光源よりも前方の領域においては、ヘッドライト周辺での誤検出の防止を重視した第2の閾値αが得られることとなる。 Thus, the reference position P O of the control map shown in position and Figure 12 of the light source is made to correspond, the front region than the light source Rf (i.e., the traveling direction of the vehicle Y direction, the vehicle width direction X In the XY plane, the position of the camera 10 in the Y direction is 0, the rear of the camera 10 is Y> 0, and the straight line Lc is represented by Y = kX. The weight wt of the threshold value 2 ″ obtained from the threshold value map of 2 can be increased. Therefore, when the second threshold value α 2 is calculated according to the above equation 1, the area around the headlight in the area ahead of the light source Thus, the second threshold value α 2 that emphasizes prevention of erroneous detection at the point is obtained.
 一方、光源の位置と図12に示す制御マップの基準位置Pとを対応させることで、光源よりも後方の領域Rr(すなわち、自車両の進行方向をY方向、車幅方向をX方向としたXY平面において、Y方向におけるカメラ10の位置を0、カメラ10よりも後方をY>0とし、直線LcをY=kXで示した場合に、Y≧kXとなる領域)において、第2の閾値マップから得られる閾値α”の重みwtを小さくすることができる。そのため、上記式1に従って第2の閾値αを算出した場合に、光源よりも後方の領域においては、隣接車両のタイヤホイールが検出しやすい第2の閾値αが得られることとなる。 On the other hand, the reference position P O of the control map shown in position and Figure 12 of the light source is made to correspond, the rear area than the light source Rr (i.e., the traveling direction of the vehicle Y direction, the vehicle width direction and the X direction In the XY plane, when the position of the camera 10 in the Y direction is 0, the rear side of the camera 10 is Y> 0, and the straight line Lc is represented by Y = kX, the second region is Y ≧ kX). The weight wt of the threshold value α 2 ″ obtained from the threshold map can be reduced. For this reason, when the second threshold value α 2 is calculated according to the above equation 1, in the region behind the light source, the tire of the adjacent vehicle The second threshold value α 2 that can be easily detected by the wheel is obtained.
 なお、検出基準設定部35は、隣接車線に照射される隣隣接車両のヘッドライトの光を、隣接車両として誤検出してしまうことを有効に防止するために、第2の閾値αを変更するものである。そのため、本実施形態では、検出基準設定部35による第2の閾値αの変更を、隣隣接車両がヘッドライトを点灯する夜間のみ行う構成とすることができる。なお、検出基準設定部35は、たとえば、カメラ10により撮像した画像の輝度が所定値以下である場合に、夜間であると判断すればよい。 The detection reference setting unit 35, the light of headlights next adjacent vehicle to be irradiated on the adjacent lane, in order to effectively prevent the erroneous detection as the adjacent vehicle, changing the second threshold value alpha 2 To do. Therefore, in this embodiment, it can be set as the structure which performs the change of the 2nd threshold value (alpha) 2 by the detection reference setting part 35 only at night when an adjacent vehicle lights a headlight. Note that the detection reference setting unit 35 may determine that it is nighttime, for example, when the luminance of an image captured by the camera 10 is equal to or less than a predetermined value.
 このように、検出基準設定部35は、カメラ10からの後方距離に応じて設定した第1の閾値αと、カメラ10と光源との位置関係に応じて設定された第2の閾値αとを設定可能となっている。そして、検出基準設定部35は、確信度判定部34により判定された確信度が所定値以上であるか否かを判断し、確信度が所定値未満である場合には、第1の閾値αを、差分波形DWに基づいて隣接車両を検出するための閾値αとして設定し、一方、確信度が所定値以上である場合には、第2の閾値αを、差分波形DWに基づいて隣接車両を検出するための閾値αとして設定する。 As described above, the detection reference setting unit 35 has the first threshold value α 1 set according to the rear distance from the camera 10 and the second threshold value α 2 set according to the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source. And can be set. Then, the detection criterion setting unit 35 determines whether or not the certainty factor determined by the certainty factor determination unit 34 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. If the certainty factor is less than the predetermined value, the first threshold value α 1 is set as a threshold value α for detecting an adjacent vehicle based on the differential waveform DW t . On the other hand, when the certainty factor is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the second threshold value α 2 is set to the differential waveform DW t . Based on this, a threshold value α for detecting the adjacent vehicle is set.
 続いて、立体物検出部33の説明に戻る。隣接車線に存在する立体物を検出した後、立体物検出部33は、一時刻前の差分波形DWt-1と現時刻における差分波形DWとの対比により、隣接車両に存在する立体物の移動距離を算出する。すなわち、立体物検出部33は、差分波形DW,DWt-1の時間変化から移動距離を算出する。 Subsequently, the description returns to the description of the three-dimensional object detection unit 33. After detecting the three-dimensional object present in the adjacent lane, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33, in contrast with the differential waveform DW t in one time before the differential waveform DW t-1 and the current time, of the three-dimensional object present on the adjacent vehicle Calculate the travel distance. That is, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 calculates the movement distance from the time change of the difference waveforms DW t and DW t−1 .
 詳細に説明すると、立体物検出部33は、図14に示すように差分波形DWを複数の小領域DWt1~DWtn(nは2以上の任意の整数)に分割する。図14は、立体物検出部33によって分割される小領域DWt1~DWtnを示す図である。小領域DWt1~DWtnは、例えば図14に示すように、互いに重複するようにして分割される。例えば小領域DWt1と小領域DWt2とは重複し、小領域DWt2と小領域DWt3とは重複する。 More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 divides the differential waveform DW t into a plurality of small areas DW t1 to DW tn (n is an arbitrary integer equal to or greater than 2). FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating the small areas DW t1 to DW tn divided by the three-dimensional object detection unit 33. The small areas DW t1 to DW tn are divided so as to overlap each other, for example, as shown in FIG. For example, the small area DW t1 and the small area DW t2 overlap, and the small area DW t2 and the small area DW t3 overlap.
 次いで、立体物検出部33は、小領域DWt1~DWtn毎にオフセット量(差分波形の横軸方向(図14の上下方向)の移動量)を求める。ここで、オフセット量は、一時刻前における差分波形DWt-1と現時刻における差分波形DWとの差(横軸方向の距離)から求められる。この際、立体物検出部33は、小領域DWt1~DWtn毎に、一時刻前における差分波形DWt-1を横軸方向に移動させた際に、現時刻における差分波形DWとの誤差が最小となる位置(横軸方向の位置)を判定し、差分波形DWt-1の元の位置と誤差が最小となる位置との横軸方向の移動量をオフセット量として求める。そして、立体物検出部33は、小領域DWt1~DWtn毎に求めたオフセット量をカウントしてヒストグラム化する。 Next, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 obtains an offset amount (amount of movement of the differential waveform in the horizontal axis direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14)) for each of the small regions DW t1 to DW tn . Here, the offset amount is determined from the difference between the differential waveform DW t in the difference waveform DW t-1 and the current time before one unit time (distance in the horizontal axis direction). At this time, three-dimensional object detection unit 33, for each small area DW t1 ~ DW tn, when moving the differential waveform DW t1 before one unit time in the horizontal axis direction, the differential waveform DW t at the current time The position where the error is minimized (the position in the horizontal axis direction) is determined, and the amount of movement in the horizontal axis between the original position of the differential waveform DW t−1 and the position where the error is minimized is obtained as an offset amount. Then, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 counts the offset amount obtained for each of the small areas DW t1 to DW tn and forms a histogram.
 図15は、立体物検出部33により得られるヒストグラムの一例を示す図である。図15に示すように、各小領域DWt1~DWtnと一時刻前における差分波形DWt-1との誤差が最小となる移動量であるオフセット量には、多少のバラつきが生じる。このため、立体物検出部33は、バラつきを含んだオフセット量をヒストグラム化し、ヒストグラムから移動距離を算出する。この際、立体物検出部33は、ヒストグラムの極大値から隣接車両の移動距離を算出する。すなわち、図15に示す例において、立体物検出部33は、ヒストグラムの極大値を示すオフセット量を移動距離τと算出する。このように、本実施形では、オフセット量にバラつきがあったとしても、その極大値から、より正確性の高い移動距離を算出することが可能となる。なお、移動距離τは、自車両V1に対する隣接車両の相対移動距離である。このため、立体物検出部33は、絶対移動距離を算出する場合には、得られた移動距離τと車速センサ20からの信号とに基づいて、絶対移動距離を算出することとなる。 FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of a histogram obtained by the three-dimensional object detection unit 33. As shown in FIG. 15, the offset amount, which is the amount of movement that minimizes the error between each of the small areas DW t1 to DW tn and the difference waveform DW t−1 one time before, has some variation. For this reason, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 forms a histogram of offset amounts including variations, and calculates a movement distance from the histogram. At this time, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 calculates the moving distance of the adjacent vehicle from the maximum value of the histogram. That is, in the example illustrated in FIG. 15, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 calculates the offset amount indicating the maximum value of the histogram as the movement distance τ * . As described above, in this embodiment, even if the offset amount varies, it is possible to calculate a more accurate movement distance from the maximum value. The moving distance τ * is a relative moving distance of the adjacent vehicle with respect to the host vehicle V1. For this reason, when calculating the absolute movement distance, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 calculates the absolute movement distance based on the obtained movement distance τ * and the signal from the vehicle speed sensor 20.
 このように、本実施形態では、異なる時刻に生成された差分波形DWの誤差が最小となるときの差分波形DWのオフセット量から立体物の移動距離を算出することで、波形という1次元の情報のオフセット量から移動距離を算出することとなり、移動距離の算出にあたり計算コストを抑制することができる。また、異なる時刻に生成された差分波形DWを複数の小領域DWt1~DWtnに分割することで、立体物のそれぞれの箇所を表わした波形を複数得ることができ、これにより、立体物のそれぞれの箇所毎にオフセット量を求めることができ、複数のオフセット量から移動距離を求めることができるため、移動距離の算出精度を向上させることができる。また、本実施形態では、高さ方向の情報を含む差分波形DWの時間変化から立体物の移動距離を算出することで、単に1点の移動のみに着目するような場合と比較して、時間変化前の検出箇所と時間変化後の検出箇所とが高さ方向の情報を含んで特定されるため、立体物において同じ箇所となり易く、同じ箇所の時間変化から移動距離を算出することとなり、移動距離の算出精度を向上させることができる。 Thus, in the present embodiment, a one-dimensional waveform is obtained by calculating the moving distance of the three-dimensional object from the offset amount of the differential waveform DW t when the error of the differential waveform DW t generated at different times is minimized. Thus, the movement distance is calculated from the offset amount of the information, and the calculation cost can be suppressed in calculating the movement distance. Further, by dividing the differential waveform DW t generated at different times into a plurality of small areas DW t1 to DW tn , it is possible to obtain a plurality of waveforms representing respective portions of the three-dimensional object. Since the offset amount can be obtained for each of the positions, and the movement distance can be obtained from a plurality of offset amounts, the calculation accuracy of the movement distance can be improved. Further, in the present embodiment, by calculating the moving distance of the three-dimensional object from the time change of the differential waveform DW t including the information in the height direction, compared with a case where attention is paid only to one point of movement, Since the detection location before the time change and the detection location after the time change are specified including information in the height direction, it is likely to be the same location in the three-dimensional object, and the movement distance will be calculated from the time change of the same location, The calculation accuracy of the movement distance can be improved.
 なお、ヒストグラム化にあたり立体物検出部33は、複数の小領域DWt1~DWtn毎に重み付けをし、小領域DWt1~DWtn毎に求めたオフセット量を重みに応じてカウントしてヒストグラム化してもよい。図16は、立体物検出部33による重み付けを示す図である。 Note that the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 weights each of the plurality of small areas DW t1 to DW tn and forms a histogram by counting the offset amount obtained for each of the small areas DW t1 to DW tn according to the weight. May be. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating weighting by the three-dimensional object detection unit 33.
 図16に示すように、小領域DW(mは1以上n-1以下の整数)は平坦となっている。すなわち、小領域DWは所定の差分を示す画素数のカウントの最大値と最小値との差が小さくなっている。立体物検出部33は、このような小領域DWについて重みを小さくする。平坦な小領域DWについては、特徴がなくオフセット量の算出にあたり誤差が大きくなる可能性が高いからである。 As shown in FIG. 16, the small area DW m (m is an integer of 1 to n−1) is flat. That is, in the small area DW m , the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value of the number of pixels indicating a predetermined difference is small. Three-dimensional object detection unit 33 to reduce the weight for such small area DW m. This is because the flat small area DW m has no characteristics and is likely to have a large error in calculating the offset amount.
 一方、小領域DWm+k(kはn-m以下の整数)は起伏に富んでいる。すなわち、小領域DWは所定の差分を示す画素数のカウントの最大値と最小値との差が大きくなっている。立体物検出部33は、このような小領域DWについて重みを大きくする。起伏に富む小領域DWm+kについては、特徴的でありオフセット量の算出を正確に行える可能性が高いからである。このように重み付けすることにより、移動距離の算出精度を向上することができる。 On the other hand, the small region DW m + k (k is an integer equal to or less than nm) is rich in undulations. That is, in the small area DW m , the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value of the number of pixels indicating a predetermined difference is large. Three-dimensional object detection unit 33 increases the weight for such small area DW m. This is because the small region DW m + k rich in undulations is characteristic and there is a high possibility that the offset amount can be accurately calculated. By weighting in this way, the calculation accuracy of the movement distance can be improved.
 なお、移動距離の算出精度を向上するために上記実施形態では差分波形DWを複数の小領域DWt1~DWtnに分割したが、移動距離の算出精度がさほど要求されない場合は小領域DWt1~DWtnに分割しなくてもよい。この場合に、立体物検出部33は、差分波形DWと差分波形DWt-1との誤差が最小となるときの差分波形DWのオフセット量から移動距離を算出することとなる。すなわち、一時刻前における差分波形DWt-1と現時刻における差分波形DWとのオフセット量を求める方法は上記内容に限定されない。 In the above embodiment, the differential waveform DW t is divided into a plurality of small areas DW t1 to DW tn in order to improve the calculation accuracy of the movement distance. However, when the calculation accuracy of the movement distance is not so required, the small area DW t1 is divided. It is not necessary to divide into ~ DW tn . In this case, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 calculates the moving distance from the offset amount of the differential waveform DW t when the error between the differential waveform DW t and the differential waveform DW t−1 is minimized. That is, the method for obtaining the offset amount of the difference waveform DW t in the difference waveform DW t-1 and the current time before one unit time is not limited to the above disclosure.
 なお、本実施形態において立体物検出部33は、自車両V1(カメラ10)の移動速度を求め、求めた移動速度から静止物についてのオフセット量を求める。静止物のオフセット量を求めた後、立体物検出部33は、ヒストグラムの極大値のうち静止物に該当するオフセット量を無視したうえで、隣接車両の移動距離を算出する。 In the present embodiment, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 obtains the moving speed of the host vehicle V1 (camera 10), and obtains the offset amount for the stationary object from the obtained moving speed. After obtaining the offset amount of the stationary object, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 ignores the offset amount corresponding to the stationary object among the maximum values of the histogram and calculates the moving distance of the adjacent vehicle.
 図17は、立体物検出部33により得られるヒストグラムの他の例を示す図である。カメラ10の画角内に隣接車両の他に静止物が存在する場合に、得られるヒストグラムには2つの極大値τ1,τ2が現れる。この場合、2つの極大値τ1,τ2のうち、いずれか一方は静止物のオフセット量である。このため、立体物検出部33は、移動速度から静止物についてのオフセット量を求め、そのオフセット量に該当する極大値について無視し、残り一方の極大値を採用して立体物の移動距離を算出する。これにより、静止物により立体物の移動距離の算出精度が低下してしまう事態を防止することができる。 FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating another example of a histogram obtained by the three-dimensional object detection unit 33. When there is a stationary object in addition to the adjacent vehicle within the angle of view of the camera 10, two maximum values τ1 and τ2 appear in the obtained histogram. In this case, one of the two maximum values τ1, τ2 is the offset amount of the stationary object. For this reason, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 calculates the offset amount for the stationary object from the moving speed, ignores the maximum value corresponding to the offset amount, and calculates the moving distance of the three-dimensional object by using the remaining maximum value. To do. Thereby, the situation where the calculation accuracy of the moving distance of a solid object falls by a stationary object can be prevented.
 なお、静止物に該当するオフセット量を無視したとしても、極大値が複数存在する場合、カメラ10の画角内に隣接車両が複数台存在すると想定される。しかし、検出領域A1,A2内に複数の隣接車両が存在することは極めて稀である。このため、立体物検出部33は、移動距離の算出を中止する。これにより、本実施形態では、極大値が複数あるような誤った移動距離を算出してしまう事態を防止することができる。 Even if the offset amount corresponding to a stationary object is ignored, if there are a plurality of maximum values, it is assumed that there are a plurality of adjacent vehicles within the angle of view of the camera 10. However, it is extremely rare that a plurality of adjacent vehicles exist in the detection areas A1 and A2. For this reason, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 stops calculating the movement distance. Thereby, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an erroneous movement distance having a plurality of maximum values is calculated.
 次に、本実施形態に係る隣接車両検出処理について説明する。図18は、本実施形態の隣接車両検出処理を示すフローチャートである。図18に示すように、まず、計算機30により、カメラ10から撮像画像Pのデータの取得が行われ(ステップS101)、視点変換部31により、取得した撮像画像Pのデータに基づいて、鳥瞰視画像PBのデータが生成される(ステップS102)。 Next, the adjacent vehicle detection process according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the adjacent vehicle detection process of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 18, first, the computer 30 acquires data of the captured image P from the camera 10 (step S101), and the viewpoint conversion unit 31 performs bird's-eye view based on the acquired data of the captured image P. Data of the image PB t is generated (step S102).
 次いで、位置合わせ部33は、鳥瞰視画像PBのデータと、一時刻前の鳥瞰視画像PBt-1のデータとを位置合わせをし、差分画像PDのデータを生成する(ステップS103)。その後、立体物検出部33は、差分画像PDのデータから、画素値が「1」の差分画素DPの数をカウントして、差分波形DWを生成する(ステップS104)。 Next, the alignment unit 33 aligns the data of the bird's-eye view image PB t and the data of the bird's-eye view image PB t−1 one hour before, and generates data of the difference image PD t (step S103). . Then, three-dimensional object detection unit 33, from the data of the difference image PD t, pixel value by counting the number of difference pixel DP "1", to generate a difference waveform DW t (step S104).
 検出基準設定部35は、差分波形DWに基づいて隣接車両を検出するための閾値αの設定を行う(ステップS105)。ここで、図19は、ステップS105の閾値αの設定処理を示すフローチャートである。検出基準設定部35は、図19に示すように、まず、カメラ10により撮像された撮像画像から、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトなどの光源を検出する(ステップS201)。 The detection reference setting unit 35 sets a threshold value α for detecting an adjacent vehicle based on the differential waveform DW t (step S105). Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the threshold value α setting processing in step S105. As shown in FIG. 19, the detection reference setting unit 35 first detects a light source such as a headlight of an adjacent vehicle from a captured image captured by the camera 10 (step S201).
 ここで、検出基準設定部35は、ノイズの影響を排除し、他車両のヘッドライトを光源として適切に検出するために、撮像画像のうち、周辺との明るさの差が所定値s以上であり、かつ、所定値s以上の大きさである画像領域を、光源に対応する領域として検出する。 Here, the detection reference setting unit 35 eliminates the influence of noise and appropriately detects a headlight of another vehicle as a light source, so that the difference in brightness from the surroundings in the captured image is equal to or greater than a predetermined value s d And an image area having a size equal to or larger than the predetermined value s 1 is detected as an area corresponding to the light source.
 そのため、検出基準設定部35は、まず、撮像画像のエッジ処理を行い、周辺との明るさの差が所定値s以上の領域を、光源候補として検出する。なお、本実施形態において、検出基準設定部35は、光源を適切に検出するために、所定値sを一定の値に限定せず、たとえば、カメラ10から光源候補までの後方距離や、光源候補が存在する領域の輝度に基づいて、所定値sを変更することができる。たとえば、検出基準設定部35は、輝度に応じて所定値sが設定された閾値マップと、カメラ10から光源候補までの後方距離に応じて所定値sが設定された閾値マップとを有し、これら2つの閾値マップを比較し、それぞれの閾値マップで得られた所定値sのうち高いほうの所定値sを、光源候補を検出するための所定値sとして選択することができる。 Therefore, the detection reference setting unit 35 first performs edge processing of the captured image, and detects a region where the brightness difference from the surroundings is equal to or greater than the predetermined value sd as a light source candidate. In the present embodiment, the detection reference setting unit 35 does not limit the predetermined value sd to a constant value in order to appropriately detect the light source, for example, the rear distance from the camera 10 to the light source candidate, The predetermined value s d can be changed based on the brightness of the region where the candidate exists. For example, the detection reference setting unit 35 has a threshold map in which a predetermined value s d is set according to the luminance, and a threshold map in which the predetermined value s d is set according to the rear distance from the camera 10 to the light source candidate. and compares these two thresholds map, that the predetermined value s d of the higher of the prescribed value s d obtained for each threshold map is selected as the predetermined value s d for detecting the light source candidate it can.
 そして、検出基準設定部35は、検出された光源候補のうち、所定値s以上の大きさである画像領域を、光源に対応する領域として検出する。なお、所定値sも一定の値に限定されず、たとえば、検出基準設定部35は、カメラ10から光源候補までの後方距離に応じて、所定値sを変更してもよい。たとえば、検出領域A1,A2の自車両進行方向における長さが10mである場合、検出基準設定部35は、検出領域A1,A2を、検出領域A1,A2のうちカメラ10から最も近い位置から、車両進行方向に0~1.5mまでの領域R1と、1.5~6mの領域R2と、6m~10mの領域R3との3つの領域に分割する。そして、検出基準設定部35は、検出領域A1,A2のうち、自車両から近い領域R1、および自車両から遠い領域R3では、たとえば、縦×横が5×5画素以上となる画像領域を、光源に対応する領域として検出し、検出領域A1,A2のうち、中央の領域R2では、たとえば、縦×横が7×7画素以上となる画像領域を、光源に対応する領域として検出することができる。 Then, the detection reference setting unit 35 detects an image area having a size equal to or larger than the predetermined value s 1 among the detected light source candidates as an area corresponding to the light source. The predetermined value s l is not limited to a certain value, for example, detection reference setting unit 35, in accordance with the rearward distance from the camera 10 to the light source candidates, may be changed a predetermined value s l. For example, when the length of the detection areas A1 and A2 in the traveling direction of the host vehicle is 10 m, the detection reference setting unit 35 moves the detection areas A1 and A2 from the position closest to the camera 10 in the detection areas A1 and A2. The vehicle is divided into three regions, ie, a region R1 from 0 to 1.5 m, a region R2 from 1.5 to 6 m, and a region R3 from 6 m to 10 m in the vehicle traveling direction. Then, the detection reference setting unit 35 includes, for example, an image area in which the height × width is 5 × 5 pixels or more in the area R1 close to the own vehicle and the area R3 far from the own vehicle in the detection areas A1 and A2. For example, in the central region R2 of the detection regions A1 and A2, an image region having a height × width of 7 × 7 pixels or more is detected as a region corresponding to the light source. it can.
 なお、ステップS201において、光源を検出できなかった場合には、検出基準設定部35は、たとえば、閾値αを予め定めた閾値に設定して、ステップS105の閾値αの設定処理を終了する。 If the light source cannot be detected in step S201, the detection reference setting unit 35 sets the threshold α to a predetermined threshold, for example, and ends the threshold α setting processing in step S105.
 次に、確信度判定部34により、検出された光源が、自車両後側方の隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである確信度の判定が行われる(ステップS202)。上述したように、確信度判定部34は、光源の数、光源の位置、光源の状態の時間変化、および光源の大きさに基づいて、検出した光源が、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである確信度を総合的に判定する。そして、検出基準設定部35は、ステップS202での確信度の判定結果に基づいて、確信度が所定値以上であるか否かを判断し、確信度が所定値以上である場合には、カメラ10からの後方距離に応じて閾値αを設定するために、ステップS204に進み、確信度が所定値未満である場合には、カメラ10と光源との位置関係に基づいて閾値αを設定するために、ステップS208に進む。 Next, the certainty factor determination unit 34 determines the certainty factor that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle adjacent to the rear side of the host vehicle (step S202). As described above, the certainty factor determination unit 34 is convinced that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle based on the number of light sources, the position of the light sources, the temporal change in the state of the light sources, and the size of the light sources. Determining the degree comprehensively. Then, the detection reference setting unit 35 determines whether or not the certainty factor is equal to or greater than a predetermined value based on the determination result of the certainty factor in step S202. In order to set the threshold value α according to the rear distance from 10, the process proceeds to step S204, and when the certainty factor is less than the predetermined value, the threshold value α is set based on the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source. Then, the process proceeds to step S208.
 ステップS204では、検出基準設定部35により、図7に示すように、検出位置の輝度に応じて、当該検出位置における第1の閾値αの取得が行われる。そして、検出基準設定部35は、ステップS204で取得した第1の閾値αを、図8に示すように、カメラ10からの後方距離に応じて規定されている第1の閾値αのゲインに基づいて変更する(ステップS205)。そして、検出基準設定部35は、検出領域A1,A2内における全て検出位置ごとに第1の閾値αを算出し、検出領域A1,A2内における全て検出位置において第1の閾値αを算出した場合に(ステップS206=Yes)、算出した第1の閾値αを、図6に示すように、差分波形DWに基づいて隣接車両を検出するための閾値αとして設定する。 In step S204, the detection reference setting unit 35, as shown in FIG. 7, in accordance with the detection position brightness, the first acquisition threshold alpha 1 at the detection position is performed. Then, the detection reference setting unit 35 uses the first threshold value α 1 acquired in step S204 as the gain of the first threshold value α 1 defined according to the rear distance from the camera 10, as shown in FIG. Is changed based on (step S205). Then, the detection reference setting unit 35 first calculates a threshold value alpha 1 for every detection position in the detection area A1, A2, calculates a first threshold value alpha 1 at all the detection positions in the detection area A1, the A2 when (step S206 = Yes), the calculated first threshold value alpha 1 was, as shown in FIG. 6, it is set as the threshold value alpha for detecting adjacent vehicle based on the difference waveform DW t.
 一方、ステップS203で、確信度が所定値未満と判断された場合には、ステップS208に進む。ステップS208では、検出基準設定部35は、図13(A)右図に示すように、検出した光源の重心位置とカメラ10の中心位置とを通る直線Lcを設定し、さらに、検出基準設定部35は、設定した直線Lcと、検出領域A2の隣隣接車線側の辺L2’との交点Oを算出する(ステップS209)。そして、検出基準設定部35は、図13(B)左図に示すように、ステップS209で算出した交点Oと、図12に示す制御マップの基準位置Pとが一致するように、図12に示す制御マップを調整する(ステップS210)。 On the other hand, if it is determined in step S203 that the certainty factor is less than the predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S208. In step S208, the detection reference setting unit 35 sets a straight line Lc that passes through the center position of the detected light source and the center position of the camera 10, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 35 calculates an intersection O between the set straight line Lc and the side L2 ′ on the adjacent adjacent lane side of the detection area A2 (step S209). Then, the detection reference setting unit 35, as shown in FIG. 13 (B) left, so that the intersection point O calculated in step S209, and the reference position P O of the control map shown in FIG. 12 coincides, 12 Is adjusted (step S210).
 そして、検出基準設定部35は、隣接車両のタイヤホイールを検出しやすいように、閾値α’が設定されている第1の閾値マップ(図7参照)と、ヘッドライト周辺での誤検出の防止を重視して、閾値α”が設定されている第2の閾値マップ(図8参照)と、ステップS210で調整した制御マップとを用いて、上記式1に従って、第2の閾値αを算出する(ステップS211)。そして、検出基準設定部35は、検出領域A1,A2内における全て検出位置ごとに第2の閾値αを算出し、検出領域A1,A2内における全て検出位置において第2の閾値αを算出した場合に(ステップS212=Yes)、算出した第2の閾値αを、図6に示すように、差分波形DWに基づいて隣接車両を検出するための閾値αとして設定する(ステップS213)。 Then, the detection criterion setting unit 35 detects the first threshold map (see FIG. 7) in which the threshold α 2 ′ is set so that the tire wheel of the adjacent vehicle is easily detected, and erroneous detection around the headlight. Emphasizing prevention, the second threshold value α 2 ″ in which the threshold value α 2 ″ is set (see FIG. 8) and the control map adjusted in step S210 are used, and the second threshold value α 2 according to the above equation 1. is calculated (step S211). then, the detection reference setting unit 35, a second threshold value alpha 2 calculates for every detection position in the detection area A1, A2, at all the detection positions in the detection area A1, the A2 when calculating the second threshold value alpha 2 (step S212 = Yes), the second threshold alpha 2 calculated, as shown in FIG. 6, the threshold value for detecting the adjacent vehicle based on the difference waveform DW t Set as α (Step S213).
 図18に戻り、立体物検出部33は、ステップS104で生成された差分波形DWのピークが、ステップS105で生成された閾値α以上となるか否かの判断を行う(ステップS106)。差分波形DWのピークが閾値α以上でない場合、すなわち差分が殆どない場合には、撮像画像P内には隣接車両が存在しないと考えられる。このため、差分波形DWのピークが閾値α以上でないと判断した場合には(ステップS106=No)、立体物検出部33は、隣接車線に隣接車両が存在しないと判断し(ステップS115)、図18に示す処理を終了する。 Returning to FIG. 18, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 determines whether or not the peak of the differential waveform DW t generated in step S104 is equal to or greater than the threshold value α generated in step S105 (step S106). When the peak of the difference waveform DW t is not equal to or greater than the threshold value α, that is, when there is almost no difference, it is considered that there is no adjacent vehicle in the captured image P. For this reason, when it is determined that the peak of the difference waveform DW t is not equal to or greater than the threshold value α (step S106 = No), the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 determines that there is no adjacent vehicle in the adjacent lane (step S115). The process shown in FIG. 18 ends.
 一方、差分波形DWのピークが閾値α以上であると判断した場合には(ステップS106=Yes)、立体物検出部33は、隣接車線に立体物が存在すると判断し、ステップS107に進み、立体物検出部33により、差分波形DWが、複数の小領域DWt1~DWtnに分割される。次いで、立体物検出部33は、小領域DWt1~DWtn毎に重み付けを行い(ステップS108)、小領域DWt1~DWtn毎のオフセット量を算出し(ステップS109)、重みを加味してヒストグラムを生成する(ステップS110)。 On the other hand, when it is determined that the peak of the differential waveform DW t is equal to or greater than the threshold value α (step S106 = Yes), the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 determines that a three-dimensional object exists in the adjacent lane, and proceeds to step S107. The three-dimensional object detection unit 33 divides the differential waveform DW t into a plurality of small areas DW t1 to DW tn . Next, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 performs weighting for each of the small areas DW t1 to DW tn (step S108), calculates an offset amount for each of the small areas DW t1 to DW tn (step S109), and adds the weights. A histogram is generated (step S110).
 そして、立体物検出部33は、ヒストグラムに基づいて自車両に対する隣接車両の移動距離である相対移動距離を算出する(ステップS111)。さらに、立体物検出部33は、相対移動距離から隣接車両の絶対移動速度を算出する(ステップS112)。このとき、立体物検出部33は、相対移動距離を時間微分して相対移動速度を算出すると共に、車速センサ20で検出された自車速を加算して、隣接車両の絶対移動速度を算出する。 Then, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 calculates a relative movement distance that is a movement distance of the adjacent vehicle with respect to the own vehicle based on the histogram (step S111). Furthermore, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 calculates the absolute movement speed of the adjacent vehicle from the relative movement distance (step S112). At this time, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 calculates the relative movement speed by differentiating the relative movement distance with respect to time, and adds the own vehicle speed detected by the vehicle speed sensor 20 to calculate the absolute movement speed of the adjacent vehicle.
 その後、立体物検出部33は、隣接車両の絶対移動速度が10km/h以上、且つ、隣接車両の自車両に対する相対移動速度が+60km/h以下であるか否かを判断する(ステップS113)。双方を満たす場合には(ステップS113=Yes)、立体物検出部33は、隣接車線に隣接車両が存在すると判断する(ステップS114)。そして、図18に示す処理を終了する。一方、いずれか一方でも満たさない場合には(ステップS113=No)、立体物検出部33は、隣接車線に隣接車両が存在しないと判断する(ステップS115)。そして、図18に示す処理を終了する。 Thereafter, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 determines whether the absolute movement speed of the adjacent vehicle is 10 km / h or more and the relative movement speed of the adjacent vehicle with respect to the own vehicle is +60 km / h or less (step S113). When both are satisfied (step S113 = Yes), the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 determines that there is an adjacent vehicle in the adjacent lane (step S114). Then, the process shown in FIG. 18 ends. On the other hand, when either one is not satisfied (step S113 = No), the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 determines that there is no adjacent vehicle in the adjacent lane (step S115). Then, the process shown in FIG. 18 ends.
 なお、本実施形態では自車両の後側方を検出領域A1,A2とし、自車両が車線変更した場合に接触する可能性があるか否かに重点を置いている。このため、ステップS113の処理が実行されている。すなわち、本実施形態にけるシステムを高速道路で作動させることを前提とすると、隣接車両の速度が10km/h未満である場合、たとえ隣接車両が存在したとしても、車線変更する際には自車両の遠く後方に位置するため問題となることが少ない。同様に、隣接車両の自車両に対する相対移動速度が+60km/hを超える場合(すなわち、隣接車両が自車両の速度よりも60km/hより大きな速度で移動している場合)、車線変更する際には自車両の前方に移動しているため問題となることが少ない。このため、ステップS113では車線変更の際に問題となる隣接車両を判断しているともいえる。 In the present embodiment, the rear sides of the host vehicle are set as detection areas A1 and A2, and emphasis is placed on whether or not there is a possibility of contact when the host vehicle changes lanes. For this reason, the process of step S113 is performed. That is, assuming that the system according to the present embodiment is operated on a highway, if the speed of the adjacent vehicle is less than 10 km / h, even if the adjacent vehicle exists, the host vehicle is required to change the lane. Because it is located far behind, there are few problems. Similarly, when the relative moving speed of the adjacent vehicle to the own vehicle exceeds +60 km / h (that is, when the adjacent vehicle is moving at a speed higher than 60 km / h than the speed of the own vehicle), when changing the lane Is less likely to be a problem because it is moving in front of the host vehicle. For this reason, it can be said that the adjacent vehicle which becomes a problem at the time of lane change is judged in step S113.
 また、ステップS113において隣接車両の絶対移動速度が10km/h以上、且つ、隣接車両の自車両に対する相対移動速度が+60km/h以下であるかを判断することにより、以下の効果がある。例えば、カメラ10の取り付け誤差によっては、静止物の絶対移動速度を数km/hであると検出してしまう場合があり得る。よって、10km/h以上であるかを判断することにより、静止物を隣接車両であると判断してしまう可能性を低減することができる。また、ノイズによっては隣接車両の自車両に対する相対速度を+60km/hを超える速度に検出してしまうことがあり得る。よって、相対速度が+60km/h以下であるかを判断することにより、ノイズによる誤検出の可能性を低減できる。 Also, in step S113, determining whether the absolute moving speed of the adjacent vehicle is 10 km / h or more and the relative moving speed of the adjacent vehicle with respect to the own vehicle is +60 km / h or less has the following effects. For example, depending on the mounting error of the camera 10, the absolute moving speed of the stationary object may be detected to be several km / h. Therefore, by determining whether the speed is 10 km / h or more, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the stationary object is determined to be an adjacent vehicle. Further, depending on the noise, the relative speed of the adjacent vehicle to the host vehicle may be detected as a speed exceeding +60 km / h. Therefore, the possibility of erroneous detection due to noise can be reduced by determining whether the relative speed is +60 km / h or less.
 さらに、ステップS113の処理に代えて、隣接車両の絶対移動速度がマイナスでないことや、0km/hでないことを判断してもよい。また、本実施形態では自車両が車線変更した場合に接触する可能性がある否かに重点を置いているため、ステップS114において隣接車両が検出された場合に、自車両の運転者に警告音を発したり、所定の表示装置により警告相当の表示を行ったりしてもよい。 Furthermore, instead of the process in step S113, it may be determined that the absolute movement speed of the adjacent vehicle is not negative or not 0 km / h. Further, in this embodiment, since an emphasis is placed on whether or not there is a possibility of contact when the host vehicle changes lanes, a warning sound is sent to the driver of the host vehicle when an adjacent vehicle is detected in step S114. Or a display corresponding to a warning may be performed by a predetermined display device.
 以上のように、第1実施形態では、自車両後方の検出領域A1,A2を異なる時刻で撮像し、撮像した撮像画像を鳥瞰視画像に変換し、異なる時刻の鳥瞰視画像の差分に基づいて、差分画像PDを生成する。そして、視点変換により立体物が倒れ込む方向に沿って、所定の差分を示す画素数をカウントして度数分布化することで、差分画像PDのデータから差分波形DWを生成する。そして、生成した差分波形DWのピークが、カメラ10からの後方距離、あるいは、カメラ10と光源との位置関係に応じて設定された閾値α以上であるか否かを判断し、差分波形DWのピークが閾値α以上である場合には、隣接車線に隣接車両が存在すると判断することで、隣接車線に存在する隣接車両を適切に検出することができる。 As described above, in the first embodiment, the detection areas A1 and A2 behind the host vehicle are captured at different times, the captured images are converted into bird's-eye view images, and based on the difference between the bird's-eye view images at different times. The difference image PD t is generated. Then, the difference waveform DW t is generated from the data of the difference image PD t by counting the number of pixels indicating a predetermined difference and performing frequency distribution along the direction in which the three-dimensional object falls by the viewpoint conversion. Then, it is determined whether or not the peak of the generated differential waveform DW t is greater than or equal to a rearward distance from the camera 10 or a threshold value α set according to the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source, and the differential waveform DW. When the peak of t is equal to or greater than the threshold value α, it is possible to appropriately detect the adjacent vehicle existing in the adjacent lane by determining that the adjacent vehicle exists in the adjacent lane.
 すなわち、本実施形態では、差分波形DWに基づいて隣接車両を検出する際に、自車両後側方の光源を検出し、検出された光源の数、光源の位置、光源の大きさ、および光源の状態の時間変化に基づいて、検出された光源が、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである確信度を判定する。そして、確信度が所定値以上である場合には、カメラ10と光源との位置関係に基づいて得られる第2の閾値αを閾値αとして設定する。すなわち、検出された光源が隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである可能性が高い場合には、図10に示すように、光源よりも前方において、ヘッドライト周辺の誤検出を防止するように閾値αを設定し、光源よりも後方において、隣接車両のタイヤホイールを検出しやすいように閾値αを設定する。これにより、たとえば、カメラ10のレンズの汚れによりヘッドライト(光源)周辺の輝度が高く、ヘッドライト(光源)の後方に存在する特徴的な部分である隣接車両のタイヤホイールが検出し難い場合でも、タイヤホイールの存在しないヘッドライト(光源)よりも前方においては、ヘッドライト周辺の誤検出を防止するように閾値αが高く設定されるため、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトによる隣接車両の誤検出を有効に防止することができ、また、ヘッドライト(光源)よりも後方においては、隣接車両のタイヤホイールを検出しやすいように閾値αが設定されるため、ヘッドライト(光源)よりも後方に存在する隣接車両のタイヤホイールを適切に検出することができる。 That is, in this embodiment, when detecting an adjacent vehicle based on the differential waveform DW t , the light source behind the host vehicle is detected, and the number of detected light sources, the position of the light source, the size of the light source, and Based on the temporal change in the state of the light source, the certainty factor that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is determined. When the certainty factor is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the second threshold value α 2 obtained based on the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source is set as the threshold value α. That is, when there is a high possibility that the detected light source is a headlight of an adjacent vehicle, as shown in FIG. 10, the threshold value α is set in front of the light source to prevent erroneous detection around the headlight. The threshold value α is set so that the tire wheel of the adjacent vehicle is easily detected behind the light source. Thereby, for example, even when the brightness of the periphery of the headlight (light source) is high due to contamination of the lens of the camera 10 and the tire wheel of the adjacent vehicle, which is a characteristic part existing behind the headlight (light source), is difficult to detect. In front of the headlight (light source) that does not have a tire wheel, the threshold α is set to be high so as to prevent erroneous detection around the headlight. It can be effectively prevented, and in the rear of the headlight (light source), the threshold α is set so that the tire wheel of the adjacent vehicle can be easily detected, so it exists behind the headlight (light source). It is possible to properly detect the tire wheel of the adjacent vehicle.
 また、本実施形態にかかる立体物検出装置1では、隣接車両のタイヤホイールを検出しやすいように閾値α’が設定されている第1の閾値マップ(図10参照)と、光源による立体物の誤検出を防止するように閾値α”が設定されている第2の閾値マップ(図11参照)とを有し、確信度が所定値以上である場合には、第1の閾値マップに設定された閾値α’および第2の閾値マップに設定された閾値α”を、上記式1に示すように、図12に示す制御マップを参照して、光源からの位置に応じて重み付けすることで、隣接車両を検出するための閾値αを算出する。 Further, in the three-dimensional object detection device 1 according to the present embodiment, the first threshold map (see FIG. 10) in which the threshold value α 2 ′ is set so as to easily detect the tire wheel of the adjacent vehicle, and the three-dimensional object by the light source. And a second threshold value map (see FIG. 11) in which a threshold value α 2 ″ is set so as to prevent false detection, and when the certainty factor is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, The threshold value α 2 ′ set and the threshold value α 2 ″ set in the second threshold map are weighted according to the position from the light source with reference to the control map shown in FIG. Thus, a threshold value α for detecting the adjacent vehicle is calculated.
 ここで、本実施形態では、光源の位置と図12に示す制御マップの基準位置Pとを一致するように、図12に示す制御マップを調整することで、光源の位置に対応する基準位置Pよりも前方の領域において、第2の閾値マップ(光源による立体物の誤検出防止を重視した閾値マップ)から得られる閾値α”の重みwtは大きくなり、光源の位置に対応する基準位置Pよりも後方の領域において、第2の閾値マップ(光源による立体物の誤検出防止を重視した閾値マップ)から得られる閾値α2”の重みwtは小さくなる。これにより、輝度が同じ場合には、光源よりも前方の領域において、隣接車両を検出するための閾値αは高くなり、光源よりも後方の領域において、隣接車両を検出するための閾値αは低くなる。そのため、本実施形態では、カメラ10のレンズの汚れによりヘッドライト(光源)周辺の輝度が高く、ヘッドライト(光源)の後方に存在する特徴的な部分である隣接車両のタイヤホイールが検出し難い場合でも、ヘッドライト(光源)の後方に存在する隣接車線のタイヤホイールを適切に検出することができる。 In the present embodiment, as the reference position P O position control map shown in FIG. 12 of the light source coincides, by adjusting the control map shown in FIG. 12, the reference position corresponding to the position of the light source In the region ahead of PO , the weight α of the threshold α 2 ″ obtained from the second threshold map (threshold map that emphasizes prevention of erroneous detection of a three-dimensional object by the light source) becomes large, and the reference corresponding to the position of the light source in the region behind from the position P O, weight wt of the second threshold value map threshold α2 obtained from (threshold map that emphasizes prevent erroneous detection of the three-dimensional object by a light source) "it is reduced. Thus, when the brightness is the same, the threshold value α for detecting the adjacent vehicle is higher in the area ahead of the light source, and the threshold value α for detecting the adjacent vehicle is lower in the area behind the light source. Become. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the periphery of the headlight (light source) is high due to dirt on the lens of the camera 10, and the tire wheel of the adjacent vehicle, which is a characteristic part existing behind the headlight (light source), is difficult to detect. Even in this case, it is possible to appropriately detect the tire wheel of the adjacent lane that exists behind the headlight (light source).
 また、隣隣接車両のヘッドライト(光源)の光が隣接車線に照射された場合に、ヘッドライト(光源)の光が隣接車線に反射し、この反射光がヘッドライト(光源)よりも前方の領域で検出される場合がある。このような場合でも、本実施形態によれば、ヘッドライト(光源)より前方の領域において、隣接車両を検出するための閾値αを、輝度に対して大きくすることができるため、このような反射光の像を、隣接車両として誤検出してしまうことを有効に防止することができる。 Further, when the light of the headlight (light source) of the adjacent vehicle is irradiated on the adjacent lane, the light of the headlight (light source) is reflected on the adjacent lane, and this reflected light is ahead of the headlight (light source). It may be detected in the area. Even in such a case, according to the present embodiment, since the threshold value α for detecting the adjacent vehicle can be increased with respect to the brightness in the area in front of the headlight (light source), such reflection is performed. It is possible to effectively prevent a light image from being erroneously detected as an adjacent vehicle.
 一方、確信度が所定値未満である場合には、カメラ10からの後方距離に基づいて得られる第1の閾値αを閾値αとして設定する。すなわち、検出された光源が隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである可能性が低い場合には、図8に示すように、検出領域A1,A2のうち、自車両から近い領域R1および自車両から遠い領域R3において、中央の領域R2と比べて、閾値αのゲインが高く設定される。これにより、領域R1,R3において、隣隣接車両からのヘッドライトから照射されるヘッドライトの光の輝度が低い場合でも、閾値αを高く設定することができ、領域R1,R3に照射された隣隣接車両V3のヘッドライトの光の像を、隣接車両として誤検出してしまうことを有効に防止することができる。 On the other hand, when the certainty factor is less than the predetermined value, the first threshold value α 1 obtained based on the rear distance from the camera 10 is set as the threshold value α. That is, when the possibility that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is low, as shown in FIG. 8, in the detection areas A1 and A2, the area R1 close to the own vehicle and the area far from the own vehicle In R3, the gain of the threshold value α is set higher than that in the central region R2. Thereby, in the regions R1 and R3, the threshold value α can be set high even when the luminance of the headlight light emitted from the headlight from the adjacent vehicle is low, and the regions R1 and R3 are irradiated with the adjacent light. It is possible to effectively prevent erroneous detection of the light image of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 as the adjacent vehicle.
 さらに、本実施形態では、確信度が所定値未満である場合には、カメラ10からの後方距離に基づいて得られる第1の閾値αを閾値αとして設定し、確信度が所定値以上である場合に、カメラ10と光源との位置関係に基づいて得られる第2の閾値αを閾値αとして設定する。ここで、確信度が所定値以上である場合、すなわち、検出された光源が隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである可能性が高い場合に、カメラ10と光源との位置関係に基づいて得られる第2の閾値αを閾値αとすることで、検出された光源が隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである可能性が高い場合に、カメラ10からの後方距離に基づいて得られる第1の閾値αを閾値αに設定する場合と比べて、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトの影響を排除し、隣接車両を適切に検出する効果をより高く得ることができる。 Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the case confidence is less than the predetermined value, the first threshold value alpha 1 obtained based on the rearward distance from the camera 10 is set as the threshold alpha, confidence is greater than a predetermined value in some cases, setting the second threshold value alpha 2 obtained on the basis of the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source as the threshold alpha. Here, when the certainty factor is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, that is, when the possibility that the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is high, the second obtained based on the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source. threshold alpha 2 to be to the threshold alpha, when the detected light source is likely to be headlights next adjacent vehicle, the first threshold value alpha 1 obtained based on the rearward distance from the camera 10 Compared with the case where the threshold value α is set, it is possible to eliminate the influence of the headlights of the adjacent vehicles and to obtain a higher effect of appropriately detecting the adjacent vehicles.
 また、確信度が所定値未満である場合、すなわち、検出された光源が、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである可能性が低い場合に、カメラ10と光源との位置関係に基づいて得られる第2の閾値αを閾値αとして設定した場合には、たとえば、光源よりも前方において閾値αが高く設定され過ぎてしまい、隣接車両が実際に存在する場合に隣接車両を適切に検出できない誤検出が生じてしまう場合があった。そのため、本実施形態では、確信度が所定値未満である場合に、カメラ10からの後方距離に基づいて得られる第1の閾値αを閾値αとして設定することで、確信度が所定値未満である場合に、カメラ10と光源との位置関係に基づいて得られる第2の閾値αを閾値αに設定する場合と比べて、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトの光による隣接車両の誤検出をより有効に防止することができ、隣接車両をより適切に検出することができる。 Further, when the certainty factor is less than a predetermined value, that is, when the possibility that the detected light source is a headlight of the adjacent vehicle is low, the second obtained based on the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source. when the threshold value alpha 2 is set as the threshold alpha, for example, too much is set higher threshold alpha in the front than light, erroneous detection can not be properly detected neighboring vehicle when an adjacent vehicle actually exists It might happen. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the certainty factor is less than a predetermined value, the certainty factor is less than the predetermined value by setting the first threshold value α1 obtained based on the rear distance from the camera 10 as the threshold value α. If it is, the second threshold value alpha 2 obtained on the basis of the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source as compared with the case of setting the threshold value alpha, the erroneous detection of the adjacent vehicle with light of headlights next adjacent vehicle It can prevent more effectively and can detect an adjacent vehicle more appropriately.
《第2実施形態》
 続いて、第2実施形態に係る立体物検出装置1aについて説明する。第2実施形態に係る立体物検出装置1aは、図20に示すように、第1実施形態の計算機30に代えて、計算機30aを備えており、以下に説明するように動作すること以外は、第1実施形態と同様である。ここで、図20は、第2実施形態に係る計算機30aの詳細を示すブロック図である。
<< Second Embodiment >>
Next, the three-dimensional object detection device 1a according to the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, the three-dimensional object detection device 1 a according to the second embodiment includes a computer 30 a instead of the computer 30 of the first embodiment, except that it operates as described below. This is the same as in the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 20 is a block diagram illustrating details of the computer 30a according to the second embodiment.
 第2実施形態にかかる立体物検出装置1aは、図20に示すように、カメラ10と計算機30aとを備えており、計算機30aは、視点変換部31、輝度差算出部36、エッジ線検出部37、立体物検出部33a、確信度判定部34、および検出基準設定部35aから構成されている。以下に、第2実施形態に係る立体物検出装置1aの各構成について説明する。 As shown in FIG. 20, the three-dimensional object detection device 1a according to the second embodiment includes a camera 10 and a computer 30a. The computer 30a includes a viewpoint conversion unit 31, a luminance difference calculation unit 36, and an edge line detection unit. 37, a three-dimensional object detection unit 33a, a certainty factor determination unit 34, and a detection reference setting unit 35a. Below, each structure of the solid-object detection apparatus 1a which concerns on 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated.
 図21は、図20のカメラ10の撮像範囲等を示す図であり、図21(a)は平面図、図21(b)は、自車両V1から後側方における実空間上の斜視図を示す。図21(a)に示すように、カメラ10は所定の画角aとされ、この所定の画角aに含まれる自車両V1から後側方を撮像する。カメラ10の画角aは、図2に示す場合と同様に、カメラ10の撮像範囲に自車両V1が走行する車線に加えて、隣接する車線も含まれるように設定されている。 FIGS. 21A and 21B are diagrams illustrating an imaging range and the like of the camera 10 in FIG. 20. FIG. 21A is a plan view, and FIG. 21B is a perspective view in real space rearward from the host vehicle V1. Show. As shown in FIG. 21A, the camera 10 has a predetermined angle of view a, and images the rear side from the host vehicle V1 included in the predetermined angle of view a. Similarly to the case shown in FIG. 2, the angle of view a of the camera 10 is set so that the imaging range of the camera 10 includes the adjacent lane in addition to the lane in which the host vehicle V1 travels.
 本例の検出領域A1,A2は、平面視(鳥瞰視された状態)において台形状とされ、これら検出領域A1,A2の位置、大きさ及び形状は、距離d~dに基づいて決定される。なお、同図に示す例の検出領域A1,A2は台形状に限らず、図2に示すように鳥瞰視された状態で矩形など他の形状であってもよい。 The detection areas A1 and A2 in this example are trapezoidal in a plan view (when viewed from a bird's eye), and the positions, sizes, and shapes of the detection areas A1 and A2 are determined based on the distances d 1 to d 4. Is done. The detection areas A1 and A2 in the example shown in the figure are not limited to a trapezoidal shape, and may be other shapes such as a rectangle when viewed from a bird's eye view as shown in FIG.
 ここで、距離d1は、自車両V1から接地線L1,L2までの距離である。接地線L1,L2は、自車両V1が走行する車線に隣接する車線に存在する立体物が地面に接触する線を意味する。本実施形態においては、自車両V1の後側方において自車両V1の車線に隣接する左右の車線を走行する隣接車両V2等(2輪車等を含む)を検出することが目的である。このため、自車両V1から白線Wまでの距離d11及び白線Wから隣接車両V2が走行すると予測される位置までの距離d12から、隣接車両V2の接地線L1,L2となる位置である距離d1を略固定的に決定しておくことができる。 Here, the distance d1 is a distance from the host vehicle V1 to the ground lines L1 and L2. The ground lines L1 and L2 mean lines on which a three-dimensional object existing in the lane adjacent to the lane in which the host vehicle V1 travels contacts the ground. In the present embodiment, the object is to detect adjacent vehicles V2 and the like (including two-wheeled vehicles) traveling in the left and right lanes adjacent to the lane of the host vehicle V1 on the rear side of the host vehicle V1. For this reason, a distance d1 which is a position to be the ground lines L1, L2 of the adjacent vehicle V2 is determined from a distance d11 from the own vehicle V1 to the white line W and a distance d12 from the white line W to a position where the adjacent vehicle V2 is predicted to travel. It can be determined substantially fixedly.
 また、距離d1については、固定的に決定されている場合に限らず、可変としてもよい。この場合に、計算機30aは、白線認識等の技術により自車両V1に対する白線Wの位置を認識し、認識した白線Wの位置に基づいて距離d11を決定する。これにより、距離d1は、決定された距離d11を用いて可変的に設定される。以下の本実施形態においては、隣接車両V2が走行する位置(白線Wからの距離d12)及び自車両V1が走行する位置(白線Wからの距離d11)は大凡決まっていることから、距離d1は固定的に決定されているものとする。 Further, the distance d1 is not limited to being fixedly determined, and may be variable. In this case, the computer 30a recognizes the position of the white line W with respect to the host vehicle V1 by a technique such as white line recognition, and determines the distance d11 based on the recognized position of the white line W. Thereby, the distance d1 is variably set using the determined distance d11. In the following embodiment, since the position where the adjacent vehicle V2 travels (distance d12 from the white line W) and the position where the host vehicle V1 travels (distance d11 from the white line W) are roughly determined, the distance d1 is It shall be fixedly determined.
 距離d2は、自車両V1の後端部から車両進行方向に伸びる距離である。この距離d2は、検出領域A1,A2が少なくともカメラ10の画角a内に収まるように決定されている。特に本実施形態において、距離d2は、画角aに区分される範囲に接するよう設定されている。距離d3は、検出領域A1,A2の車両進行方向における長さを示す距離である。この距離d3は、検出対象となる立体物の大きさに基づいて決定される。本実施形態においては、検出対象が隣接車両V2等であるため、距離d3は、隣接車両V2を含む長さに設定される。 The distance d2 is a distance extending in the vehicle traveling direction from the rear end portion of the host vehicle V1. The distance d2 is determined so that the detection areas A1 and A2 are at least within the angle of view a of the camera 10. In particular, in the present embodiment, the distance d2 is set so as to be in contact with the range divided into the angle of view a. The distance d3 is a distance indicating the length of the detection areas A1, A2 in the vehicle traveling direction. This distance d3 is determined based on the size of the three-dimensional object to be detected. In the present embodiment, since the detection target is the adjacent vehicle V2 or the like, the distance d3 is set to a length including the adjacent vehicle V2.
 距離d4は、図21(b)に示すように、実空間において隣接車両V2等のタイヤを含むように設定された高さを示す距離である。距離d4は、鳥瞰視画像においては図21(a)に示す長さとされる。なお、距離d4は、鳥瞰視画像において左右の隣接車線よりも更に隣接する車線(すなわち2車線隣りの隣隣接車線)を含まない長さとすることもできる。自車両V1の車線から2車線隣の車線を含んでしまうと、自車両V1が走行している車線である自車線の左右の隣接車線に隣接車両V2が存在するのか、2車線隣りの隣隣接車線に隣隣接車両が存在するのかについて、区別が付かなくなってしまうためである。 As shown in FIG. 21B, the distance d4 is a distance indicating a height set so as to include a tire such as the adjacent vehicle V2 in the real space. The distance d4 is a length shown in FIG. 21A in the bird's-eye view image. Note that the distance d4 may be a length that does not include a lane that is further adjacent to the left and right lanes in the bird's-eye view image (that is, the adjacent lane that is adjacent to two lanes). If the lane adjacent to the two lanes is included from the lane of the own vehicle V1, there is an adjacent vehicle V2 in the adjacent lane on the left and right of the own lane that is the lane in which the own vehicle V1 is traveling. This is because it becomes impossible to distinguish whether there is an adjacent vehicle on the lane.
 以上のように、距離d1~距離d4が決定され、これにより検出領域A1,A2の位置、大きさ及び形状が決定される。具体的に説明すると、距離d1により、台形をなす検出領域A1,A2の上辺b1の位置が決定される。距離d2により、上辺b1の始点位置C1が決定される。距離d3により、上辺b1の終点位置C2が決定される。カメラ10から始点位置C1に向かって伸びる直線L3により、台形をなす検出領域A1,A2の側辺b2が決定される。同様に、カメラ10から終点位置C2に向かって伸びる直線L4により、台形をなす検出領域A1,A2の側辺b3が決定される。距離d4により、台形をなす検出領域A1,A2の下辺b4の位置が決定される。このように、各辺b1~b4により囲まれる領域が検出領域A1,A2とされる。この検出領域A1,A2は、図21(b)に示すように、自車両V1から後側方における実空間上では真四角(長方形)となる。 As described above, the distances d1 to d4 are determined, and thereby the positions, sizes, and shapes of the detection areas A1 and A2 are determined. More specifically, the position of the upper side b1 of the detection areas A1 and A2 forming a trapezoid is determined by the distance d1. The starting point position C1 of the upper side b1 is determined by the distance d2. The end point position C2 of the upper side b1 is determined by the distance d3. The side b2 of the detection areas A1 and A2 having a trapezoidal shape is determined by a straight line L3 extending from the camera 10 toward the starting point position C1. Similarly, a side b3 of trapezoidal detection areas A1 and A2 is determined by a straight line L4 extending from the camera 10 toward the end position C2. The position of the lower side b4 of the detection areas A1 and A2 having a trapezoidal shape is determined by the distance d4. Thus, the areas surrounded by the sides b1 to b4 are set as the detection areas A1 and A2. As shown in FIG. 21B, the detection areas A1 and A2 are true squares (rectangles) in real space on the rear side from the host vehicle V1.
 図20に戻り、視点変換部31は、カメラ10による撮像にて得られた所定領域の撮像画像データを入力する。視点変換部31は、入力した撮像画像データに対して、鳥瞰視される状態の鳥瞰画像データに視点変換処理を行う。鳥瞰視される状態とは、上空から例えば鉛直下向き(又は、やや斜め下向き)に見下ろす仮想カメラの視点から見た状態である。この視点変換処理は、例えば特開2008-219063号公報に記載された技術によって実現することができる。 Referring back to FIG. 20, the viewpoint conversion unit 31 inputs captured image data of a predetermined area obtained by imaging with the camera 10. The viewpoint conversion unit 31 performs viewpoint conversion processing on the input captured image data to the bird's-eye image data in a bird's-eye view state. The bird's-eye view is a state seen from the viewpoint of a virtual camera looking down from above, for example, vertically downward (or slightly obliquely downward). This viewpoint conversion process can be realized by a technique described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-219063.
 輝度差算出部36は、鳥瞰視画像に含まれる立体物のエッジを検出するために、視点変換部31により視点変換された鳥瞰視画像データに対して、輝度差の算出を行う。輝度差算出部36は、実空間における鉛直方向に伸びる鉛直仮想線に沿った複数の位置ごとに、当該各位置の近傍の2つの画素間の輝度差を算出する。輝度差算出部36は、実空間における鉛直方向に伸びる鉛直仮想線を1本だけ設定する手法と、鉛直仮想線を2本設定する手法との何れかによって輝度差を算出することができる。 The luminance difference calculation unit 36 calculates a luminance difference with respect to the bird's-eye view image data subjected to viewpoint conversion by the viewpoint conversion unit 31 in order to detect the edge of the three-dimensional object included in the bird's-eye view image. For each of a plurality of positions along a vertical imaginary line extending in the vertical direction in the real space, the brightness difference calculation unit 36 calculates a brightness difference between two pixels in the vicinity of each position. The luminance difference calculation unit 36 can calculate the luminance difference by either a method of setting only one vertical virtual line extending in the vertical direction in the real space or a method of setting two vertical virtual lines.
 ここでは、鉛直仮想線を2本設定する具体的な手法について説明する。輝度差算出部36は、視点変換された鳥瞰視画像に対して、実空間で鉛直方向に伸びる線分に該当する第1鉛直仮想線と、第1鉛直仮想線と異なり実空間で鉛直方向に伸びる線分に該当する第2鉛直仮想線とを設定する。輝度差算出部36は、第1鉛直仮想線上の点と第2鉛直仮想線上の点との輝度差を、第1鉛直仮想線及び第2鉛直仮想線に沿って連続的に求める。以下、この輝度差算出部36の動作について詳細に説明する。 Here, a specific method for setting two vertical virtual lines will be described. The brightness difference calculating unit 36 applies a first vertical imaginary line corresponding to a line segment extending in the vertical direction in the real space and a vertical direction in the real space different from the first vertical imaginary line with respect to the bird's eye view image that has undergone viewpoint conversion. A second vertical imaginary line corresponding to the extending line segment is set. The luminance difference calculation unit 36 continuously obtains the luminance difference between the point on the first vertical imaginary line and the point on the second vertical imaginary line along the first vertical imaginary line and the second vertical imaginary line. Hereinafter, the operation of the luminance difference calculation unit 36 will be described in detail.
 輝度差算出部36は、図22(a)に示すように、実空間で鉛直方向に伸びる線分に該当し、且つ、検出領域A1を通過する第1鉛直仮想線La(以下、注目線Laという)を設定する。また、輝度差算出部36は、注目線Laと異なり、実空間で鉛直方向に伸びる線分に該当し、且つ、検出領域A1を通過する第2鉛直仮想線Lr(以下、参照線Lrという)を設定する。ここで参照線Lrは、実空間における所定距離だけ注目線Laから離間する位置に設定される。なお、実空間で鉛直方向に伸びる線分に該当する線とは、鳥瞰視画像においてはカメラ10の位置Psから放射状に広がる線となる。この放射状に広がる線は、鳥瞰視に変換した際に立体物が倒れ込む方向に沿う線である。 As shown in FIG. 22A, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 corresponds to a line segment extending in the vertical direction in real space and passes through the detection area A1 (hereinafter, attention line La). Set). In addition, unlike the attention line La, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 corresponds to a line segment extending in the vertical direction in the real space and also passes through the detection area A1 and is a second vertical imaginary line Lr (hereinafter referred to as a reference line Lr). Set. Here, the reference line Lr is set at a position separated from the attention line La by a predetermined distance in the real space. Note that the line corresponding to the line segment extending in the vertical direction in the real space is a line that spreads radially from the position Ps of the camera 10 in the bird's-eye view image. This radially extending line is a line along the direction in which the three-dimensional object falls when converted to bird's-eye view.
 輝度差算出部36は、注目線La上に注目点Pa(第1鉛直仮想線上の点)を設定する。また、輝度差算出部36は、参照線Lr上に参照点Pr(第2鉛直板想線上の点)を設定する。これら注目線La、注目点Pa、参照線Lr、参照点Prは、実空間上において図22(b)に示す関係となる。図22(b)から明らかなように、注目線La及び参照線Lrは、実空間上において鉛直方向に伸びた線であり、注目点Paと参照点Prとは、実空間上において略同じ高さに設定される点である。なお、注目点Paと参照点Prとは必ずしも厳密に同じ高さである必要はなく、注目点Paと参照点Prとが同じ高さとみなせる程度の誤差は許容される。 The luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets a point of interest Pa (a point on the first vertical imaginary line) on the line of interest La. In addition, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets a reference point Pr (a point on the second vertical plate) on the reference line Lr. The attention line La, the attention point Pa, the reference line Lr, and the reference point Pr have the relationship shown in FIG. 22B in the real space. As apparent from FIG. 22B, the attention line La and the reference line Lr are lines extending in the vertical direction in the real space, and the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr are substantially the same height in the real space. This is the point that is set. Note that the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr do not necessarily have the same height, and an error that allows the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr to be regarded as the same height is allowed.
 輝度差算出部36は、注目点Paと参照点Prとの輝度差を求める。仮に、注目点Paと参照点Prとの輝度差が大きいと、注目点Paと参照点Prとの間にエッジが存在すると考えられる。特に、第2実施形態では、検出領域A1,A2に存在する立体物を検出するために、鳥瞰視画像に対して実空間において鉛直方向に伸びる線分として鉛直仮想線を設定しているため、注目線Laと参照線Lrとの輝度差が高い場合には、注目線Laの設定箇所に立体物のエッジがある可能性が高い。このため、図20に示すエッジ線検出部37は、注目点Paと参照点Prとの輝度差に基づいてエッジ線を検出する。 The luminance difference calculation unit 36 calculates a luminance difference between the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr. If the luminance difference between the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr is large, it is considered that an edge exists between the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr. In particular, in the second embodiment, in order to detect a three-dimensional object existing in the detection areas A1 and A2, a vertical virtual line is set as a line segment extending in the vertical direction in the real space with respect to the bird's-eye view image, In the case where the luminance difference between the attention line La and the reference line Lr is high, there is a high possibility that there is an edge of the three-dimensional object at the set position of the attention line La. For this reason, the edge line detection unit 37 shown in FIG. 20 detects an edge line based on the luminance difference between the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr.
 この点をより詳細に説明する。図23は、輝度差算出部36の詳細動作を示す図であり、図23(a)は鳥瞰視された状態の鳥瞰視画像を示し、図23(b)は、図23(a)に示した鳥瞰視画像の一部B1を拡大した図である。なお、図23についても検出領域A1のみを図示して説明するが、検出領域A2についても同様の手順で輝度差を算出する。 This point will be explained in more detail. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a detailed operation of the luminance difference calculation unit 36, FIG. 23 (a) shows a bird's-eye view image in a bird's-eye view state, and FIG. 23 (b) is shown in FIG. 23 (a). It is the figure which expanded a part B1 of the bird's-eye view image. 23, only the detection area A1 is illustrated and described, but the luminance difference is calculated in the same procedure for the detection area A2.
 カメラ10が撮像した撮像画像内に隣接車両V2が映っていた場合に、図23(a)に示すように、鳥瞰視画像内の検出領域A1に隣接車両V2が現れる。図23(b)に図23(a)中の領域B1の拡大図を示すように、鳥瞰視画像上において、隣接車両V2のタイヤのゴム部分上に注目線Laが設定されていたとする。この状態において、輝度差算出部36は、先ず参照線Lrを設定する。参照線Lrは、注目線Laから実空間上において所定の距離だけ離れた位置に、鉛直方向に沿って設定される。具体的には、本実施形態に係る立体物検出装置1aにおいて、参照線Lrは、注目線Laから実空間上において10cmだけ離れた位置に設定される。これにより、参照線Lrは、鳥瞰視画像上において、例えば隣接車両V2のタイヤのゴムから10cm相当だけ離れた隣接車両V2のタイヤのホイール上に設定される。 When the adjacent vehicle V2 is reflected in the captured image captured by the camera 10, the adjacent vehicle V2 appears in the detection area A1 in the bird's-eye view image as shown in FIG. As shown in the enlarged view of the region B1 in FIG. 23A in FIG. 23B, it is assumed that the attention line La is set on the rubber portion of the tire of the adjacent vehicle V2 on the bird's-eye view image. In this state, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 first sets a reference line Lr. The reference line Lr is set along the vertical direction at a position away from the attention line La by a predetermined distance in the real space. Specifically, in the three-dimensional object detection device 1a according to the present embodiment, the reference line Lr is set at a position separated from the attention line La by 10 cm in the real space. Thereby, the reference line Lr is set on the wheel of the tire of the adjacent vehicle V2, which is separated from the rubber of the tire of the adjacent vehicle V2, for example, by 10 cm, on the bird's eye view image.
 次に、輝度差算出部36は、注目線La上に複数の注目点Pa1~PaNを設定する。図23(b)においては、説明の便宜上、6つの注目点Pa1~Pa6(以下、任意の点を示す場合には単に注目点Paiという)を設定している。なお、注目線La上に設定する注目点Paの数は任意でよい。以下の説明では、N個の注目点Paが注目線La上に設定されたものとして説明する。 Next, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets a plurality of attention points Pa1 to PaN on the attention line La. In FIG. 23B, for the convenience of explanation, six attention points Pa1 to Pa6 (hereinafter simply referred to as attention point Pai when an arbitrary point is indicated) are set. Note that the number of attention points Pa set on the attention line La may be arbitrary. In the following description, it is assumed that N attention points Pa are set on the attention line La.
 次に、輝度差算出部36は、実空間上において各注目点Pa1~PaNと同じ高さとなるように各参照点Pr1~PrNを設定する。そして、輝度差算出部36は、同じ高さ同士の注目点Paと参照点Prとの輝度差を算出する。これにより、輝度差算出部36は、実空間における鉛直方向に伸びる鉛直仮想線に沿った複数の位置(1~N)ごとに、2つの画素の輝度差を算出する。輝度差算出部36は、例えば第1注目点Pa1とは、第1参照点Pr1との間で輝度差を算出し、第2注目点Pa2とは、第2参照点Pr2との間で輝度差を算出することとなる。これにより、輝度差算出部36は、注目線La及び参照線Lrに沿って、連続的に輝度差を求める。すなわち、輝度差算出部36は、第3~第N注目点Pa3~PaNと第3~第N参照点Pr3~PrNとの輝度差を順次求めていくこととなる。 Next, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets the reference points Pr1 to PrN so as to be the same height as the attention points Pa1 to PaN in the real space. Then, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 calculates the luminance difference between the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr having the same height. Accordingly, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 calculates the luminance difference between the two pixels for each of a plurality of positions (1 to N) along the vertical imaginary line extending in the vertical direction in the real space. The luminance difference calculation unit 36 calculates, for example, a luminance difference between the first attention point Pa1 and the first reference point Pr1, and a luminance difference between the second attention point Pa2 and the second reference point Pr2. Will be calculated. Thereby, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 continuously obtains the luminance difference along the attention line La and the reference line Lr. That is, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sequentially obtains the luminance difference between the third to Nth attention points Pa3 to PaN and the third to Nth reference points Pr3 to PrN.
 輝度差算出部36は、検出領域A1内において注目線Laをずらしながら、上記の参照線Lrの設定、注目点Pa及び参照点Prの設定、輝度差の算出といった処理を繰り返し実行する。すなわち、輝度差算出部36は、注目線La及び参照線Lrのそれぞれを、実空間上において接地線L1の延在方向に同一距離だけ位置を変えながら上記の処理を繰り返し実行する。輝度差算出部36は、例えば、前回処理において参照線Lrとなっていた線を注目線Laに設定し、この注目線Laに対して参照線Lrを設定して、順次輝度差を求めていくことになる。 The luminance difference calculation unit 36 repeatedly executes the processing such as setting the reference line Lr, setting the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr, and calculating the luminance difference while shifting the attention line La in the detection area A1. That is, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 repeatedly executes the above processing while changing the positions of the attention line La and the reference line Lr by the same distance in the extending direction of the ground line L1 in the real space. For example, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets a line that has been the reference line Lr in the previous process as the attention line La, sets the reference line Lr for the attention line La, and sequentially obtains the luminance difference. It will be.
 このように、第2実施形態では、実空間上で略同じ高さとなる注目線La上の注目点Paと参照線Lr上の参照点Prとから輝度差を求めることで、鉛直方向に伸びるエッジが存在する場合における輝度差を明確に検出することができる。また、実空間において鉛直方向に伸びる鉛直仮想線同士の輝度比較を行うために、鳥瞰視画像に変換することによって立体物が路面からの高さに応じて引き伸ばされてしまっても、立体物の検出処理が影響されることはなく、立体物の検出精度を向上させることができる。 As described above, in the second embodiment, the edge extending in the vertical direction is obtained by calculating the luminance difference from the attention point Pa on the attention line La and the reference point Pr on the reference line Lr that are substantially the same height in the real space. It is possible to clearly detect a luminance difference in the case where there is. Also, in order to compare the brightness of vertical virtual lines extending in the vertical direction in real space, even if the three-dimensional object is stretched according to the height from the road surface by converting to a bird's-eye view image, The detection process is not affected, and the detection accuracy of the three-dimensional object can be improved.
 図20に戻り、エッジ線検出部37は、輝度差算出部36により算出された連続的な輝度差から、エッジ線を検出する。例えば、図23(b)に示す場合、第1注目点Pa1と第1参照点Pr1とは、同じタイヤ部分に位置するために、輝度差は、小さい。一方、第2~第6注目点Pa2~Pa6はタイヤのゴム部分に位置し、第2~第6参照点Pr2~Pr6はタイヤのホイール部分に位置する。したがって、第2~第6注目点Pa2~Pa6と第2~第6参照点Pr2~Pr6との輝度差は大きくなる。このため、エッジ線検出部37は、輝度差が大きい第2~第6注目点Pa2~Pa6と第2~第6参照点Pr2~Pr6との間にエッジ線が存在することを検出することができる。 20, the edge line detection unit 37 detects the edge line from the continuous luminance difference calculated by the luminance difference calculation unit 36. For example, in the case illustrated in FIG. 23B, the first attention point Pa1 and the first reference point Pr1 are located in the same tire portion, and thus the luminance difference is small. On the other hand, the second to sixth attention points Pa2 to Pa6 are located in the rubber part of the tire, and the second to sixth reference points Pr2 to Pr6 are located in the wheel part of the tire. Therefore, the luminance difference between the second to sixth attention points Pa2 to Pa6 and the second to sixth reference points Pr2 to Pr6 becomes large. Therefore, the edge line detection unit 37 may detect that an edge line exists between the second to sixth attention points Pa2 to Pa6 and the second to sixth reference points Pr2 to Pr6 having a large luminance difference. it can.
 具体的には、エッジ線検出部37は、エッジ線を検出するにあたり、先ず下記の数式2に従って、i番目の注目点Pai(座標(xi,yi))とi番目の参照点Pri(座標(xi’,yi’))との輝度差から、i番目の注目点Paiに属性付けを行う。
[数2]
I(xi,yi)>I(xi’,yi’)+tのとき
 s(xi,yi)=1
I(xi,yi)<I(xi’,yi’)-tのとき
 s(xi,yi)=-1
上記以外のとき
 s(xi,yi)=0
Specifically, when detecting the edge line, the edge line detection unit 37 firstly follows the following Equation 2 to determine the i-th attention point Pai (coordinates (xi, yi)) and the i-th reference point Pri (coordinates ( xi ′, yi ′)) and the i th attention point Pai are attributed.
[Equation 2]
When I (xi, yi)> I (xi ′, yi ′) + t s (xi, yi) = 1
When I (xi, yi) <I (xi ′, yi ′) − t s (xi, yi) = − 1
Otherwise s (xi, yi) = 0
 上記数式2において、tは所定の閾値を示し、I(xi,yi)はi番目の注目点Paiの輝度値を示し、I(xi’,yi’)はi番目の参照点Priの輝度値を示す。上記数式2によれば、注目点Paiの輝度値が、参照点Priに閾値tを加えた輝度値よりも高い場合には、当該注目点Paiの属性s(xi,yi)は‘1’となる。一方、注目点Paiの輝度値が、参照点Priから輝度閾値tを減じた輝度値よりも低い場合には、当該注目点Paiの属性s(xi,yi)は‘-1’となる。注目点Paiの輝度値と参照点Priの輝度値とがそれ以外の関係である場合には、注目点Paiの属性s(xi,yi)は‘0’となる。 In Equation 2, t represents a predetermined threshold, I (xi, yi) represents the luminance value of the i-th attention point Pai, and I (xi ′, yi ′) represents the luminance value of the i-th reference point Pri. Indicates. According to Equation 2, when the luminance value of the attention point Pai is higher than the luminance value obtained by adding the threshold value t to the reference point Pri, the attribute s (xi, yi) of the attention point Pai is “1”. Become. On the other hand, when the luminance value of the attention point Pai is lower than the luminance value obtained by subtracting the luminance threshold t from the reference point Pri, the attribute s (xi, yi) of the attention point Pai is “−1”. When the luminance value of the attention point Pai and the luminance value of the reference point Pri are in other relationships, the attribute s (xi, yi) of the attention point Pai is “0”.
 次にエッジ線検出部37は、下記数式3に基づいて、注目線Laに沿った属性sの連続性c(xi,yi)から、注目線Laがエッジ線であるか否かを判定する。
[数3]
s(xi,yi)=s(xi+1,yi+1)のとき(且つ0=0を除く)、
 c(xi,yi)=1
上記以外のとき、
 c(xi,yi)=0
Next, the edge line detection unit 37 determines whether or not the attention line La is an edge line from the continuity c (xi, yi) of the attribute s along the attention line La based on Equation 3 below.
[Equation 3]
When s (xi, yi) = s (xi + 1, yi + 1) (and excluding 0 = 0),
c (xi, yi) = 1
Other than the above
c (xi, yi) = 0
 注目点Paiの属性s(xi,yi)と隣接する注目点Pai+1の属性s(xi+1,yi+1)とが同じである場合には、連続性c(xi,yi)は‘1’となる。注目点Paiの属性s(xi,yi)と隣接する注目点Pai+1の属性s(xi+1,yi+1)とが同じではない場合には、連続性c(xi,yi)は‘0’となる。 When the attribute s (xi, yi) of the attention point Pai and the attribute s (xi + 1, yi + 1) of the adjacent attention point Pai + 1 are the same, the continuity c (xi, yi) is “1”. When the attribute s (xi, yi) of the attention point Pai is not the same as the attribute s (xi + 1, yi + 1) of the adjacent attention point Pai + 1, the continuity c (xi, yi) is “0”.
 次に、エッジ線検出部37は、注目線La上の全ての注目点Paの連続性cについて総和を求める。エッジ線検出部37は、求めた連続性cの総和を注目点Paの数Nで割ることにより、連続性cを正規化する。そして、エッジ線検出部37は、正規化した値が閾値θを超えた場合に、注目線Laをエッジ線と判断する。なお、閾値θは、予め実験等によって設定された値である。 Next, the edge line detection unit 37 obtains the sum for the continuity c of all the attention points Pa on the attention line La. The edge line detection unit 37 normalizes the continuity c by dividing the obtained sum of continuity c by the number N of points of interest Pa. Then, the edge line detection unit 37 determines that the attention line La is an edge line when the normalized value exceeds the threshold θ. The threshold value θ is a value set in advance through experiments or the like.
 すなわち、エッジ線検出部37は、下記数式4に基づいて注目線Laがエッジ線であるか否かを判断する。そして、エッジ線検出部37は、検出領域A1上に描かれた注目線Laの全てについてエッジ線であるか否かを判断する。
[数4]
Σc(xi,yi)/N>θ
That is, the edge line detection unit 37 determines whether or not the attention line La is an edge line based on Equation 4 below. Then, the edge line detection unit 37 determines whether or not all the attention lines La drawn on the detection area A1 are edge lines.
[Equation 4]
Σc (xi, yi) / N> θ
 このように、第2実施形態では、注目線La上の注目点Paと参照線Lr上の参照点Prとの輝度差に基づいて注目点Paに属性付けを行い、注目線Laに沿った属性の連続性cに基づいて当該注目線Laがエッジ線であるかを判断するので、輝度の高い領域と輝度の低い領域との境界をエッジ線として検出し、人間の自然な感覚に沿ったエッジ検出を行うことができる。この効果について詳細に説明する。図24は、エッジ線検出部37の処理を説明する画像例を示す図である。この画像例は、輝度の高い領域と輝度の低い領域とが繰り返される縞模様を示す第1縞模様101と、輝度の低い領域と輝度の高い領域とが繰り返される縞模様を示す第2縞模様102とが隣接した画像である。また、この画像例は、第1縞模様101の輝度が高い領域と第2縞模様102の輝度の低い領域とが隣接すると共に、第1縞模様101の輝度が低い領域と第2縞模様102の輝度が高い領域とが隣接している。この第1縞模様101と第2縞模様102との境界に位置する部位103は、人間の感覚によってはエッジとは知覚されない傾向にある。 As described above, in the second embodiment, the attention point Pa is attributed based on the luminance difference between the attention point Pa on the attention line La and the reference point Pr on the reference line Lr, and the attribute along the attention line La is attributed. Since it is determined whether the attention line La is an edge line based on the continuity c of the image, the boundary between the high luminance area and the low luminance area is detected as an edge line, and an edge in line with a natural human sense Detection can be performed. This effect will be described in detail. FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image for explaining the processing of the edge line detection unit 37. In this image example, a first striped pattern 101 showing a striped pattern in which a high brightness area and a low brightness area are repeated, and a second striped pattern showing a striped pattern in which a low brightness area and a high brightness area are repeated. 102 is an adjacent image. Further, in this image example, a region where the brightness of the first striped pattern 101 is high and a region where the brightness of the second striped pattern 102 is low are adjacent to each other, and a region where the brightness of the first striped pattern 101 is low and the second striped pattern 102. Is adjacent to a region with high brightness. The portion 103 located at the boundary between the first striped pattern 101 and the second striped pattern 102 tends not to be perceived as an edge depending on human senses.
 これに対し、輝度の低い領域と輝度が高い領域とが隣接しているために、輝度差のみでエッジを検出すると、当該部位103はエッジとして認識されてしまう。しかし、エッジ線検出部37は、部位103における輝度差に加えて、当該輝度差の属性に連続性がある場合にのみ部位103をエッジ線として判定するので、エッジ線検出部37は、人間の感覚としてエッジ線として認識しない部位103をエッジ線として認識してしまう誤判定を抑制でき、人間の感覚に沿ったエッジ検出を行うことができる。 On the other hand, since the low luminance region and the high luminance region are adjacent to each other, if the edge is detected only by the luminance difference, the portion 103 is recognized as an edge. However, the edge line detection unit 37 determines the part 103 as an edge line only when the luminance difference attribute has continuity in addition to the luminance difference in the part 103. An erroneous determination of recognizing a part 103 that is not recognized as an edge line as a sensation as an edge line can be suppressed, and edge detection according to a human sensation can be performed.
 図20に戻り、立体物検出部33aは、エッジ線検出部37により検出されたエッジ線の量に基づいて立体物を検出する。上述したように、本実施形態に係る立体物検出装置1aは、実空間上において鉛直方向に伸びるエッジ線を検出する。鉛直方向に伸びるエッジ線が多く検出されるということは、検出領域A1,A2に立体物が存在する可能性が高いということである。このため、立体物検出部33aは、エッジ線検出部37により検出されたエッジ線の量に基づいて立体物を検出する。具体的には、立体物検出部33aは、エッジ線検出部37により検出されたエッジ線の量が、所定の閾値β以上であるか否かを判断し、エッジ線の量が所定の閾値β以上である場合には、エッジ線検出部37により検出されたエッジ線は、立体物のエッジ線であるものと判断し、これにより、エッジ線に基づく立体物を隣接車両V2として検出する。 20, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a detects a three-dimensional object based on the amount of edge lines detected by the edge line detection unit 37. As described above, the three-dimensional object detection device 1a according to the present embodiment detects an edge line extending in the vertical direction in real space. The fact that many edge lines extending in the vertical direction are detected means that there is a high possibility that a three-dimensional object exists in the detection areas A1 and A2. For this reason, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a detects a three-dimensional object based on the amount of edge lines detected by the edge line detection unit 37. Specifically, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a determines whether the amount of edge lines detected by the edge line detection unit 37 is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value β, and the amount of edge lines is determined to be a predetermined threshold value β. In the case described above, the edge line detected by the edge line detection unit 37 is determined to be an edge line of a three-dimensional object, thereby detecting the three-dimensional object based on the edge line as the adjacent vehicle V2.
 このように、エッジ線は、所定輝度差を示す画素の分布情報の一態様であり、本実施形態における「画素の分布情報」は、撮像画像を鳥瞰視画像に視点変換した際における立体物が倒れ込む方向に沿って検出される「輝度差が所定閾値以上の画素」の分布の状態を示す情報と位置付けることができる。つまり、立体物検出部33aは、視点変換部31により得られた鳥瞰視画像において、鳥瞰視画像に視点変換した際に立体物が倒れ込む方向に沿って輝度差が閾値t以上の画素の分布情報を検出し、立体物が倒れこむ方向における画素の分布の度合い(エッジ線の量)が所定閾値β以上である場合に、画素の分布情報(エッジ線)に基づいて、立体物を検出する。 As described above, the edge line is an aspect of pixel distribution information indicating a predetermined luminance difference, and the “pixel distribution information” in the present embodiment is a three-dimensional object when a captured image is converted into a bird's-eye view image. It can be positioned as information indicating the distribution state of “pixels having a luminance difference equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold” detected along the falling direction. That is, in the bird's-eye view image obtained by the viewpoint conversion unit 31, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a distributes pixels whose luminance difference is greater than or equal to the threshold value t along the direction in which the three-dimensional object falls when the viewpoint is converted into the bird's-eye view image. When the degree of pixel distribution (the amount of edge lines) in the direction in which the three-dimensional object falls is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold β, the three-dimensional object is detected based on the pixel distribution information (edge line).
 なお、第2実施形態において、エッジ線に基づいて隣接車両を検出するための閾値βは、検出基準設定部35aにより設定される。第2実施形態において、検出基準設定部35aは、第1実施形態と同様に、図20に示す確信度判定部34により検出された確信度に基づいて、カメラ10からの後方距離に応じて設定した第3の閾値β、および、カメラ10と光源との位置関係に応じて設定された第4の閾値βのいずれか一方を、エッジ線に基づいて隣接車両を検出するための閾値βとして設定する。 In the second embodiment, the threshold value β for detecting the adjacent vehicle based on the edge line is set by the detection reference setting unit 35a. In the second embodiment, the detection reference setting unit 35a is set according to the rear distance from the camera 10 based on the certainty factor detected by the certainty factor determination unit 34 shown in FIG. 20 as in the first embodiment. One of the third threshold value β 1 and the fourth threshold value β 2 set according to the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source is used as a threshold value β for detecting an adjacent vehicle based on the edge line. Set as.
 すなわち、検出基準設定部35aは、確信度判定部34により判定された確信度が所定値以上であるか否かを判断し、確信度が所定値未満である場合には、カメラ10からの後方距離に応じて設定した第3の閾値βを、エッジ線に基づいて隣接車両を検出するための閾値βとして設定し、一方、確信度が所定値以上である場合には、カメラ10と光源との位置関係に応じて設定された第4の閾値βを、エッジ線に基づいて隣接車両を検出するための閾値βとして設定する。 That is, the detection criterion setting unit 35a determines whether or not the certainty level determined by the certainty level determination unit 34 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The third threshold value β 1 set according to the distance is set as a threshold value β for detecting the adjacent vehicle based on the edge line. On the other hand, when the certainty factor is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the camera 10 and the light source the fourth threshold value beta 2 which is set in accordance with the positional relationship between, is set as the threshold value beta for detecting adjacent vehicle based on the edge lines.
 なお、第2実施形態において、確信度判定部34は、第1実施形態と同様に、検出した光源の数、光源の位置、および光源の状態の時間変化に基づいて、検出した光源が隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである確信度を総合的に判定する。このように、光源の数、光源の位置、および光源の状態の時間変化を総合的に判断することで、検出した光源が隣隣接車両のヘッドライトに起因するものであるか否かを適切に判定することができる。さらに、確信度判定部34は、第1実施形態と同様に、確信度を判定する際に、検出した光源の大きさを加味する構成とすることができる。 In the second embodiment, the certainty factor determination unit 34 is adjacent to the detected light source based on the number of detected light sources, the position of the light sources, and the temporal change in the state of the light sources, as in the first embodiment. The reliability that is the headlight of the vehicle is comprehensively determined. In this way, by comprehensively determining the number of light sources, the positions of the light sources, and the temporal changes in the state of the light sources, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the detected light sources are caused by the headlights of adjacent vehicles. Can be determined. Furthermore, as in the first embodiment, the certainty factor determination unit 34 can be configured to take into account the size of the detected light source when determining the certainty factor.
 ここで、第2実施形態において、検出基準部設定部35aは、第3の閾値βを、以下のように設定する。すなわち、検出基準設定部35aは、第1実施形態と同様に、図25に示すように、検出領域A1,A2内の検出位置(たとえば、検出領域A1,A2内の注目線Laに対応する位置)における輝度が高いほど、第3の閾値βを高い値に設定する。また、検出基準設定部35aは、図26に示すように、検出領域A1,A2のうち領域R1においては、領域R2よりも、第3の閾値βのゲインを大きくすることで、検出領域A1,A2内の領域R1において、検出領域A1,A2内の領域R2と比べて、輝度に応じて設定された第3の閾値βを高い値に変更する。さらに、検出基準設定部35aは、検出領域A1,A2内の領域R1において、カメラ10からの後方距離が小さいほど(自車両に近いほど)、第3の閾値βのゲインを大きくすることで、自車両に近いほど、輝度に応じて設定された第3の閾値βを高い値に変更する。 Here, in the second embodiment, detecting the reference portion setting unit 35a, the third threshold value beta 1, it is set as follows. That is, as in the first embodiment, the detection reference setting unit 35a, as shown in FIG. 25, detects positions within the detection areas A1 and A2 (for example, positions corresponding to the attention line La within the detection areas A1 and A2). The third threshold value β 1 is set to a higher value as the luminance at () is higher. The detection reference setting unit 35a, as shown in FIG. 26, in the region R1 of the detection areas A1, A2, rather than the region R2, by increasing the third gain threshold beta 1, the detection area A1 , A 2, the third threshold value β 1 set in accordance with the luminance is changed to a higher value than the region R 2 in the detection areas A 1, A 2. Further, the detection reference setting unit 35a, in the region R1 of the detection area A1, A2, as rear distance from the camera 10 is small (closer to the host vehicle), by increasing the third gain threshold beta 1 The third threshold value β 1 set in accordance with the brightness is changed to a higher value as it is closer to the host vehicle.
 また同様に、検出基準設定部35aは、図22に示すように、検出領域A1,A2のうち領域R3においても、検出領域A1,A2内の領域R2よりも、第3の閾値βのゲインを大きくすることで、検出領域A1,A2内の領域R3において、検出領域A1,A2内の領域R2と比べて、輝度に応じて設定された第3の閾値βを高い値に変更する。さらに、検出基準設定部35aは,検出領域A1,A2内の領域R3においては、カメラ10からの後方距離が大きいほど(自車両から遠いほど)、第3の閾値βのゲインを大きくすることで、検出領域A1,A2内の領域R3においては、自車両から遠いほど、輝度に応じて設定された第3の閾値βを高い値に変更する。 Similarly, detection reference setting unit 35a, as shown in FIG. 22, in the region R3 of the detection area A1, A2, than the region R2 of the detection area A1, A2, the third threshold value beta 1 of the gain the by increasing, in the region R3 in the detection area A1, A2, compared to the region R2 of the detection area A1, A2, to change to a higher value of the third threshold value beta 1, which is set according to the brightness. Further, the detection reference setting unit 35a, in the area R3 in the detection areas A1, A2 are more rearward distance from the camera 10 is larger (farther from the vehicle), increasing the third gain threshold beta 1 in, in the region R3 in the detection area A1, A2 is further away from the vehicle, it is changed to a higher value of the third threshold value beta 1, which is set according to the brightness.
 これにより、第2実施形態でも、第1実施形態と同様に、たとえば夜間に、隣隣接車両V3のヘッドライトの光が隣接車線に照射される場面において、隣隣接車両V3から照射されるヘッドライトの光の輝度が高い領域R2であっても、あるいは、隣隣接車両V3から照射されるヘッドライトの光の輝度が低い領域R1、R3であっても、ヘッドライトの光の像を、隣接車両として誤検出してしまうことを有効に防止することができる。 Thereby, also in 2nd Embodiment, similarly to 1st Embodiment, the headlight irradiated from the adjacent vehicle V3 in the scene where the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 is irradiated to an adjacent lane at night, for example. Even in the region R2 where the luminance of the light of the headlight is high, or in the regions R1, R3 where the luminance of the light of the headlight irradiated from the adjacent vehicle V3 is low, an image of the light of the headlight is displayed on the adjacent vehicle. Can be effectively prevented from being erroneously detected.
 また、第2実施形態において、検出基準部設定部35aは、第4の閾値βを、以下のように設定する。すなわち、検出基準設定部35aは、第1実施形態と同様に、図27に示すように、隣接車両の特徴的な部分であるタイヤホイールを検出しやすいように、検出領域A1,A2内の検出位置における輝度に応じて、所定の閾値β’が設定されている第3の閾値マップと、図28に示すように、ヘッドライト周辺において隣接車両の誤検出が生じないように、検出領域A1,A2内の検出位置における輝度に応じて、所定の閾値β”が設定されている第4の閾値マップとを有している。また、検出基準設定部35aは、第1実施形態と同様に、図29に示すように、第4の閾値マップから得られる閾値β”の重みwtを規定した制御マップを備えている。 In the second embodiment, detecting the reference portion setting unit 35a is the fourth threshold value beta 2, is set as follows. That is, as in the first embodiment, the detection reference setting unit 35a detects in the detection areas A1 and A2 so as to easily detect the tire wheel that is a characteristic part of the adjacent vehicle, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 28, a third threshold map in which a predetermined threshold value β 2 ′ is set according to the luminance at the position, and a detection region A1 so that no erroneous detection of adjacent vehicles occurs around the headlight. , A2 and a fourth threshold map in which a predetermined threshold β 2 ″ is set according to the luminance at the detection position in A2. The detection reference setting unit 35a is the same as in the first embodiment. In addition, as shown in FIG. 29, a control map defining the weight wt of the threshold value β 2 ″ obtained from the fourth threshold value map is provided.
 そして、検出基準設定部35aは、第1実施形態と同様に、下記数式5に従って、第3の閾値マップにより得られた閾値β’と、第4の閾値マップにより得られた閾値β”とを、光源の位置に応じて、図29に示す制御マップで規定した閾値β”の重みwtで重み付けし、これにより、エッジ情報に基づいて隣接車両を検出するための第4の閾値βを算出する。なお、第2実施形態においても、第1実施形態と同様に、検出した光源の位置と、図29に示す制御マップの基準位置Pとを一致させて、図29の制御マップの調整が行われる。
[数5]
 第4の閾値β={(1-wt)・第3の閾値マップから得られた閾値β’}+(wt・第4の閾値マップから得られた閾値β”)
Then, similarly to the first embodiment, the detection criterion setting unit 35a performs the threshold β 2 ′ obtained by the third threshold map and the threshold β 2 ″ obtained by the fourth threshold map according to the following formula 5. Is weighted with the weight wt of the threshold value β 2 ″ defined in the control map shown in FIG. 29 according to the position of the light source, thereby the fourth threshold value β for detecting the adjacent vehicle based on the edge information. 2 is calculated. Also in the second embodiment, like the first embodiment, the position of the detected light sources, by matching the reference position P O of the control map shown in FIG. 29, adjustment line of the control map of FIG. 29 Is called.
[Equation 5]
4th threshold value β 2 = {(1-wt) · threshold value β 2 ′} + obtained from the third threshold map + (wt · threshold value β 2 ″ obtained from the fourth threshold map)
 このように、検出基準設定部35aは、カメラ10からの後方距離に応じて設定した第3の閾値βと、カメラ10と光源との位置関係に応じて設定された第4の閾値βとを設定可能となっている。そして、検出基準設定部35aは、確信度判定部34により判定された確信度が所定値以上であるか否かを判断し、確信度が所定値未満である場合には、第3の閾値βを、エッジ線に基づいて隣接車両を検出するための閾値βとして設定し、一方、確信度が所定値以上である場合には、第4の閾値βを、エッジ線に基づいて隣接車両を検出するための閾値βとして設定する。 Thus, the detection reference setting unit 35a, the third and threshold beta 1 of which is set in accordance with the rearward distance from the camera 10, a fourth threshold value which is set according to the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source beta 2 And can be set. Then, the detection criterion setting unit 35a determines whether or not the certainty factor determined by the certainty factor determination unit 34 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. If the certainty factor is less than the predetermined value, the third threshold value β 1 is set as the threshold value β for detecting the adjacent vehicle based on the edge line. On the other hand, when the certainty factor is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the fourth threshold value β 2 is set based on the edge line. Is set as a threshold value β for detecting.
 また、立体物検出部33aは、立体物を検出するに先立って、エッジ線検出部37により検出されたエッジ線が正しいものであるか否かを判定する。立体物検出部33aは、エッジ線上の鳥瞰視画像のエッジ線に沿った輝度変化が所定の閾値tb以上であるか否かを判定する。エッジ線上の鳥瞰視画像の輝度変化が閾値tb以上である場合には、当該エッジ線が誤判定により検出されたものと判断する。一方、エッジ線上の鳥瞰視画像の輝度変化が閾値tb未満である場合には、当該エッジ線が正しいものと判定する。なお、この閾値tbは、実験等により予め設定された値である。 Further, prior to detecting the three-dimensional object, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a determines whether or not the edge line detected by the edge line detection unit 37 is correct. The three-dimensional object detection unit 33a determines whether or not the luminance change along the edge line of the bird's-eye view image on the edge line is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value tb. When the brightness change of the bird's-eye view image on the edge line is equal to or greater than the threshold value tb, it is determined that the edge line has been detected by erroneous determination. On the other hand, when the luminance change of the bird's-eye view image on the edge line is less than the threshold value tb, it is determined that the edge line is correct. The threshold value tb is a value set in advance by experiments or the like.
 図30は、エッジ線の輝度分布を示す図であり、図30(a)は検出領域A1に立体物としての隣接車両V2が存在した場合のエッジ線及び輝度分布を示し、図30(b)は検出領域A1に立体物が存在しない場合のエッジ線及び輝度分布を示す。 FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating the luminance distribution of the edge line, and FIG. 30A illustrates the edge line and the luminance distribution when the adjacent vehicle V2 as a three-dimensional object is present in the detection area A1, and FIG. Indicates an edge line and a luminance distribution when there is no solid object in the detection area A1.
 図30(a)に示すように、鳥瞰視画像において隣接車両V2のタイヤゴム部分に設定された注目線Laがエッジ線であると判断されていたとする。この場合、注目線La上の鳥瞰視画像の輝度変化はなだらかなものとなる。これは、カメラ10により撮像された画像が鳥瞰視画像に視点変換されたことにより、隣接車両V2のタイヤが鳥瞰視画像内で引き延ばされたことによる。一方、図30(b)に示すように、鳥瞰視画像において路面に描かれた「50」という白色文字部分に設定された注目線Laがエッジ線であると誤判定されていたとする。この場合、注目線La上の鳥瞰視画像の輝度変化は起伏の大きいものとなる。これは、エッジ線上に、白色文字における輝度が高い部分と、路面等の輝度が低い部分とが混在しているからである。 As shown in FIG. 30 (a), it is assumed that the attention line La set in the tire rubber portion of the adjacent vehicle V2 is determined to be an edge line in the bird's-eye view image. In this case, the luminance change of the bird's-eye view image on the attention line La is gentle. This is because the tire of the adjacent vehicle V2 is extended in the bird's-eye view image by converting the image captured by the camera 10 into a bird's-eye view image. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30B, it is assumed that the attention line La set in the white character portion “50” drawn on the road surface in the bird's-eye view image is erroneously determined as an edge line. In this case, the brightness change of the bird's-eye view image on the attention line La has a large undulation. This is because a portion with high brightness in white characters and a portion with low brightness such as a road surface are mixed on the edge line.
 以上のような注目線La上の輝度分布の相違に基づいて、立体物検出部33aは、エッジ線が誤判定により検出されたものか否かを判定する。立体物検出部33aは、エッジ線に沿った輝度変化が所定の閾値tb以上である場合には、当該エッジ線が誤判定により検出されたものであり、当該エッジ線は、立体物に起因するものではないと判断する。これにより、路面上の「50」といった白色文字や路肩の雑草等がエッジ線として判定されてしまい、立体物の検出精度が低下することを抑制する。一方、立体物検出部33aは、エッジ線に沿った輝度変化が所定の閾値tb未満である場合には、当該エッジ線は、立体物のエッジ線であると判断し、立体物が存在するものと判断する。 Based on the difference in luminance distribution on the attention line La as described above, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a determines whether or not the edge line is detected by erroneous determination. When the luminance change along the edge line is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value tb, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a has detected the edge line by erroneous determination, and the edge line is caused by the three-dimensional object. Judge that it is not. Thereby, white characters such as “50” on the road surface, weeds on the road shoulder, and the like are determined as edge lines, and the detection accuracy of the three-dimensional object is prevented from being lowered. On the other hand, when the change in luminance along the edge line is less than the predetermined threshold value tb, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a determines that the edge line is an edge line of the three-dimensional object, and the three-dimensional object exists. Judge.
 具体的には、立体物検出部33aは、下記数式6,7の何れかにより、エッジ線の輝度変化を算出する。このエッジ線の輝度変化は、実空間上における鉛直方向の評価値に相当する。下記数式6は、注目線La上のi番目の輝度値I(xi,yi)と、隣接するi+1番目の輝度値I(xi+1,yi+1)との差分の二乗の合計値によって輝度分布を評価する。また、下記数式7は、注目線La上のi番目の輝度値I(xi,yi)と、隣接するi+1番目の輝度値I(xi+1,yi+1)との差分の絶対値の合計値よって輝度分布を評価する。
[数6]
鉛直相当方向の評価値=Σ[{I(xi,yi)-I(xi+1,yi+1)}
[数7]
鉛直相当方向の評価値=Σ|I(xi,yi)-I(xi+1,yi+1)|
Specifically, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a calculates the luminance change of the edge line according to any one of the following formulas 6 and 7. The luminance change of the edge line corresponds to the evaluation value in the vertical direction in the real space. Equation 6 below evaluates the luminance distribution by the sum of the squares of the differences between the i-th luminance value I (xi, yi) on the attention line La and the adjacent i + 1-th luminance value I (xi + 1, yi + 1). . Also, the following Expression 7 is a luminance distribution based on the sum of absolute values of differences between the i-th luminance value I (xi, yi) on the attention line La and the adjacent i + 1-th luminance value I (xi + 1, yi + 1). To evaluate.
[Equation 6]
Evaluation value in the vertical equivalent direction = Σ [{I (xi, yi) −I (xi + 1, yi + 1)} 2 ]
[Equation 7]
Evaluation value in the vertical equivalent direction = Σ | I (xi, yi) −I (xi + 1, yi + 1) |
 なお、数式7に限らず、下記数式8のように、閾値t2を用いて隣接する輝度値の属性bを二値化して、当該二値化した属性bを全ての注目点Paについて総和してもよい。
[数8]
鉛直相当方向の評価値=Σb(xi,yi)
但し、|I(xi,yi)-I(xi+1,yi+1)|>t2のとき、
 b(xi,yi)=1
上記以外のとき、
 b(xi,yi)=0
Not only Formula 7 but also Formula 8 below, the attribute b of the adjacent luminance value is binarized using the threshold value t2, and the binarized attribute b is summed for all the attention points Pa. Also good.
[Equation 8]
Evaluation value in the vertical equivalent direction = Σb (xi, yi)
However, when | I (xi, yi) −I (xi + 1, yi + 1) |> t2,
b (xi, yi) = 1
Other than the above
b (xi, yi) = 0
 注目点Paiの輝度値と参照点Priの輝度値との輝度差の絶対値が閾値t2よりも大きい場合、当該注目点Pa(xi,yi)の属性b(xi,yi)は‘1’となる。それ以外の関係である場合には、注目点Paiの属性b(xi,yi)は‘0’となる。この閾値t2は、注目線Laが同じ立体物上にないことを判定するために実験等によって予め設定されている。そして、立体物検出部33aは、注目線La上の全注目点Paについての属性bを総和して、鉛直相当方向の評価値を求めることで、エッジ線が立体物に起因するものであり、立体物が存在するか否かを判定する。 When the absolute value of the luminance difference between the luminance value of the attention point Pai and the luminance value of the reference point Pri is larger than the threshold value t2, the attribute b (xi, yi) of the attention point Pa (xi, yi) is “1”. Become. If the relationship is other than that, the attribute b (xi, yi) of the attention point Pai is '0'. This threshold value t2 is set in advance by an experiment or the like in order to determine that the attention line La is not on the same three-dimensional object. Then, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a sums the attributes b for all the attention points Pa on the attention line La and obtains an evaluation value in the vertical equivalent direction, whereby the edge line is caused by the three-dimensional object. It is determined whether or not a three-dimensional object exists.
 次に、第2実施形態に係る隣接車両検出方法について説明する。図31は、本実施形態に係る隣接車両検出方法の詳細を示すフローチャートである。なお、図31においては、便宜上、検出領域A1を対象とする処理について説明するが、検出領域A2についても同様の処理が実行される。 Next, an adjacent vehicle detection method according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing details of the adjacent vehicle detection method according to the present embodiment. In FIG. 31, for the sake of convenience, processing for the detection area A1 will be described, but the same processing is executed for the detection area A2.
 まず、ステップS301では、カメラ10により、画角a及び取付位置によって特定された所定領域の撮像が行われ、計算機30aにより、カメラ10により撮像された撮像画像Pの画像データが取得される。次に視点変換部31は、ステップS302において、取得した画像データについて視点変換を行い、鳥瞰視画像データを生成する。 First, in step S301, the camera 10 captures an image of a predetermined area specified by the angle of view a and the attachment position, and the computer 30a acquires image data of the captured image P captured by the camera 10. Next, in step S302, the viewpoint conversion unit 31 performs viewpoint conversion on the acquired image data to generate bird's-eye view image data.
 次に、輝度差算出部36は、ステップS303において、検出領域A1上に注目線Laを設定する。このとき、輝度差算出部36は、実空間上において鉛直方向に伸びる線に相当する線を注目線Laとして設定する。次に、輝度差算出部36は、ステップS304において、検出領域A1上に参照線Lrを設定する。このとき、輝度差算出部36は、実空間上において鉛直方向に伸びる線分に該当し、且つ、注目線Laと実空間上において所定距離離れた線を参照線Lrとして設定する。 Next, in step S303, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets the attention line La on the detection area A1. At this time, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets a line corresponding to a line extending in the vertical direction in the real space as the attention line La. Next, in step S304, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets a reference line Lr on the detection area A1. At this time, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets a reference line Lr that corresponds to a line segment extending in the vertical direction in the real space and is separated from the attention line La by a predetermined distance in the real space.
 次に、輝度差算出部36は、ステップS305において、注目線La上に複数の注目点Paを設定する。この際に、輝度差算出部36は、エッジ線検出部37によるエッジ検出時に問題とならない程度の数の注目点Paを設定する。また、輝度差算出部36は、ステップS306において、実空間上において注目点Paと参照点Prとが略同じ高さとなるように、参照点Prを設定する。これにより、注目点Paと参照点Prとが略水平方向に並ぶこととなり、実空間上において鉛直方向に伸びるエッジ線を検出しやすくなる。 Next, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets a plurality of attention points Pa on the attention line La in step S305. At this time, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets a number of attention points Pa that do not cause a problem when the edge is detected by the edge line detection unit 37. In step S306, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 sets the reference point Pr so that the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr are substantially the same height in the real space. Thereby, the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr are arranged in a substantially horizontal direction, and it becomes easy to detect an edge line extending in the vertical direction in the real space.
 次に、輝度差算出部36は、ステップS307において、実空間上において同じ高さとなる注目点Paと参照点Prとの輝度差を算出する。次に、エッジ線検出部37は、上記の数式2に従って、各注目点Paの属性sを算出する。次に、エッジ線検出部37は、ステップS308において、上記の数式3に従って、各注目点Paの属性sの連続性cを算出する。次に、エッジ線検出部37は、ステップS309において、上記数式4に従って、連続性cの総和を正規化した値が閾値θより大きいか否かを判定する。そして、正規化した値が閾値θよりも大きいと判断した場合(ステップS309=Yes)、エッジ線検出部37は、ステップS310において、当該注目線Laをエッジ線として検出する。そして、処理はステップS311に移行する。正規化した値が閾値θより大きくないと判断した場合(ステップS309=No)、エッジ線検出部37は、当該注目線Laをエッジ線として検出せず、処理はステップS311に移行する。 Next, in step S307, the luminance difference calculation unit 36 calculates the luminance difference between the attention point Pa and the reference point Pr that have the same height in the real space. Next, the edge line detection unit 37 calculates the attribute s of each attention point Pa according to Equation 2 above. Next, in step S308, the edge line detection unit 37 calculates the continuity c of the attribute s of each attention point Pa according to the above mathematical formula 3. Next, in step S309, the edge line detection unit 37 determines whether the value obtained by normalizing the total sum of continuity c is greater than the threshold value θ according to the above formula 4. If it is determined that the normalized value is greater than the threshold θ (step S309 = Yes), the edge line detection unit 37 detects the attention line La as an edge line in step S310. Then, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the normalized value is not greater than the threshold θ (step S309 = No), the edge line detection unit 37 does not detect the attention line La as an edge line, and the process proceeds to step S311.
 ステップS311において、計算機30aは、検出領域A1上に設定可能な注目線Laの全てについて上記のステップS303~ステップS310の処理を実行したか否かを判断する。全ての注目線Laについて上記処理をしていないと判断した場合(ステップS311=No)、ステップS303に処理を戻して、新たに注目線Laを設定して、ステップS311までの処理を繰り返す。一方、全ての注目線Laについて上記処理をしたと判断した場合(ステップS311=Yes)、処理はステップS312に移行する。 In step S311, the computer 30a determines whether or not the processing in steps S303 to S310 has been executed for all the attention lines La that can be set on the detection area A1. When it is determined that the above processing has not been performed for all the attention lines La (step S311 = No), the processing returns to step S303, a new attention line La is set, and the processing up to step S311 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the above process has been performed for all the attention lines La (step S311 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S312.
 ステップS312において、立体物検出部33aは、ステップS310において検出された各エッジ線について、当該エッジ線に沿った輝度変化を算出する。立体物検出部33aは、上記数式6,7,8の何れかの式に従って、エッジ線の輝度変化を算出する。次に立体物検出部33aは、ステップS313において、エッジ線のうち、輝度変化が所定の閾値tb以上であるエッジ線を除外する。すなわち、輝度変化の大きいエッジ線は正しいエッジ線ではないと判定し、エッジ線を立体物の検出には使用しない。これは、上述したように、検出領域A1に含まれる路面上の文字や路肩の雑草等がエッジ線として検出されてしまうことを抑制するためである。したがって、所定の閾値tbとは、予め実験等によって求められた、路面上の文字や路肩の雑草等によって発生する輝度変化に基づいて設定された値となる。一方、立体物検出部33aは、エッジ線のうち、輝度変化が所定の閾値tb未満であるエッジ線を、立体物のエッジ線と判断し、これにより、隣接車両に存在する立体物を検出する。 In step S312, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a calculates a luminance change along the edge line for each edge line detected in step S310. The three-dimensional object detection unit 33a calculates the luminance change of the edge line according to any one of the above formulas 6, 7, and 8. Next, in step S313, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a excludes edge lines whose luminance change is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value tb from among the edge lines. That is, it is determined that an edge line having a large luminance change is not a correct edge line, and the edge line is not used for detecting a three-dimensional object. As described above, this is to prevent characters on the road surface, roadside weeds, and the like included in the detection area A1 from being detected as edge lines. Therefore, the predetermined threshold value tb is a value set based on a luminance change generated by characters on the road surface, weeds on the road shoulder, or the like, which is obtained in advance through experiments or the like. On the other hand, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a determines an edge line whose luminance change is less than the predetermined threshold value tb among the edge lines as an edge line of the three-dimensional object, and thereby detects a three-dimensional object existing in the adjacent vehicle. .
 次いで、ステップS314では、検出基準設定部35aにより、ステップS313で検出した立体物が隣接車両であるか否かを判定するための閾値βの設定が行われる。具体的には、検出基準設定部35aは、第1実施形態のステップS105と同様に、自車両後側方の光源を検出し、検出された光源が、自車両後側方の隣隣接車両のヘッドライトであることの確からしさを示す確信度を判定する。そして、検出基準設定部35a、確信度が所定値以上である場合には、第3の閾値βを、エッジ線に基づいて隣接車両を検出するための閾値βとして設定し、一方、確信度が所定値未満である場合には、第4の閾値βを、エッジ線に基づいて隣接車両を検出するための閾値βとして設定する。 Next, in step S314, the threshold value β for determining whether or not the three-dimensional object detected in step S313 is an adjacent vehicle is set by the detection reference setting unit 35a. Specifically, the detection reference setting unit 35a detects the light source on the rear side of the host vehicle, as in step S105 of the first embodiment, and the detected light source is the next adjacent vehicle on the rear side of the host vehicle. A certainty factor indicating the certainty of being a headlight is determined. Then, when the detection reference setting unit 35a, confidence is not less than the predetermined value, the third threshold value beta 1, and set as a threshold value beta for detecting adjacent vehicle based on the edge lines, whereas, confidence There If it is less than the predetermined value, the fourth threshold value beta 2, is set as the threshold value beta for detecting adjacent vehicle based on the edge lines.
 ステップS315では、立体物検出部33aにより、エッジ線の量が、ステップS314で設定した閾値β以上であるか否かの判断が行われる。エッジ線の量が閾値β以上であると判定された場合(ステップS315=Yes)は、立体物検出部33aは、ステップS316において、検出領域A1内に隣接車両が存在すると判定する。一方、エッジ線の量が閾値β以上ではないと判定された場合(ステップS315=No)、立体物検出部33aは、ステップS317において、検出領域A1内に隣接車両が存在しないと判定する。その後、図31に示す処理を終了する。 In step S315, the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a determines whether the amount of the edge line is equal to or larger than the threshold value β set in step S314. When it is determined that the amount of the edge line is equal to or larger than the threshold value β (step S315 = Yes), the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a determines in step S316 that an adjacent vehicle exists in the detection area A1. On the other hand, when it is determined that the amount of the edge line is not equal to or greater than the threshold value β (step S315 = No), the three-dimensional object detection unit 33a determines in step S317 that there is no adjacent vehicle in the detection area A1. Then, the process shown in FIG. 31 is complete | finished.
 以上のように、第2実施形態では、撮像画像を鳥瞰視画像に変換し、変換した鳥瞰視画像から立体物のエッジ情報を検出する。そして、鳥瞰視画像で検出したエッジ線の量が、カメラ10と光源との位置関係に応じて設定された閾値β以上であるか否かを判断し、エッジ線の量が閾値β以上である場合に、隣接車線に立体物が存在すると判定することで、隣接車線に存在する立体物を適切に検出することができる。また、第2実施形態では、エッジ情報に基づいて隣接車両を検出する際に、自車両後側方の光源を検出し、検出した光源が、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトであることの確信度を判定する。そして、確信度が所定値未満である場合には、カメラ10からの後方距離に基づいて得られる第3の閾値βを閾値βとして設定し、一方、確信度が所定値以上である場合には、カメラ10と光源との位置関係に基づいて得られる第4の閾値βを閾値βとして設定する。これにより、第2実施形態では、第1実施形態の効果に加えて、エッジ情報に基づいて隣接車両を検出する際において、検出された光源が隣接車両のヘッドライトである場合に、レンズの汚れによりヘッドライト(光源)周辺の輝度が高い場合にも、ヘッドライト(光源)の後方に存在する隣接車両の特徴的な部分である隣接車両のタイヤホイールを適切に検出することができるとともに、ヘッドライト(光源)の前方において、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトの光が道路に反射した反射光などによる隣接車両の誤検出を有効に防止することができ、また、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトでない場合でも、隣接車両を適切に検出することが可能となる。 As described above, in the second embodiment, a captured image is converted into a bird's-eye view image, and edge information of the three-dimensional object is detected from the converted bird's-eye view image. Then, it is determined whether or not the amount of edge lines detected in the bird's-eye view image is equal to or larger than a threshold value β set according to the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source, and the amount of edge lines is equal to or larger than the threshold value β. In this case, it is possible to appropriately detect the three-dimensional object existing in the adjacent lane by determining that the three-dimensional object exists in the adjacent lane. Moreover, in 2nd Embodiment, when detecting an adjacent vehicle based on edge information, the light source of the back side of the own vehicle is detected, and the certainty that the detected light source is a headlight of the adjacent vehicle adjacent to the vehicle is detected. judge. When the certainty factor is less than the predetermined value, the third threshold value β 1 obtained based on the rear distance from the camera 10 is set as the threshold value β, while when the certainty factor is equal to or larger than the predetermined value. Sets the fourth threshold β 2 obtained based on the positional relationship between the camera 10 and the light source as the threshold β. As a result, in the second embodiment, in addition to the effects of the first embodiment, when detecting the adjacent vehicle based on the edge information, if the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle, the dirt on the lens. Even when the brightness around the headlight (light source) is high, the tire wheel of the adjacent vehicle, which is a characteristic part of the adjacent vehicle existing behind the headlight (light source), can be detected appropriately, and the head In front of the light (light source), it is possible to effectively prevent erroneous detection of the adjacent vehicle due to the reflected light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle adjacent to the road, and even if it is not the headlight of the adjacent vehicle Adjacent vehicles can be detected appropriately.
 なお、以上説明した実施形態は、本発明の理解を容易にするために記載されたものであって、本発明を限定するために記載されたものではない。したがって、上記の実施形態に開示された各要素は、本発明の技術的範囲に属する全ての設計変更や均等物をも含む趣旨である。 The embodiment described above is described for easy understanding of the present invention, and is not described for limiting the present invention. Therefore, each element disclosed in the above embodiment is intended to include all design changes and equivalents belonging to the technical scope of the present invention.
 たとえば、上述した第1実施形態では、上記式1に示すように、図10に示す第1の閾値マップから得られる閾値α’と、図11に示す第2の閾値マップから得られる閾値α”とを、図12に示す制御マップに規定された重みwtで重み付けし、第2の閾値αを算出する構成を例示したが、この構成に限定されるものではなく、たとえば、図11に示す第2の閾値マップを用いずに、下記数式9に示すように、図10に示す第1の閾値マップから得られる閾値α’を、図32に示す制御マップに規定された重みwtで重み付けして、第2の閾値αを算出する構成としてもよい。
[数9]
 第2の閾値α=(wt・第1の閾値マップから得られた閾値α’)
For example, in the first embodiment described above, as shown in Equation 1, the threshold value α 2 ′ obtained from the first threshold map shown in FIG. 10 and the threshold value α obtained from the second threshold map shown in FIG. 2 ″ is weighted with the weight wt defined in the control map shown in FIG. 12 and the second threshold value α 2 is calculated. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, FIG. Without using the second threshold map shown in FIG. 4, the threshold value α 2 ′ obtained from the first threshold map shown in FIG. 10 is set to the weight wt defined in the control map shown in FIG. in weighted, it may calculate the second threshold value alpha 2.
[Equation 9]
Second threshold α 2 = (wt · threshold α 2 ′ obtained from first threshold map)
 なお、図32に示す制御マップでは、基準位置Pにおける重りwtがx(x>1)となっており、基準位置Pより後方においては、重りwtが1となるように設定されている。さらに、図32に示す制御マップでは、図12に示す制御マップと同様に、基準位置Pの前方においては、基準位置Pの後方よりも、重りwtが高い値で推移している。そのため、この場合でも、光源の位置と基準位置Pとを対応させた場合に、ヘッドライト周辺での隣接車両の誤検出を有効に防止しつつ、ヘッドライト(光源)より後方に存在する隣接車線のタイヤホイールを適切に検出することができ、その結果、隣接車線を走行する隣接車両を適切に検出することができる。 In the control map shown in FIG. 32, the weight wt at the reference position P O has become a x (x> 1), in the rear from the reference position P O, the weight wt is set to be 1 . Further, in the control map shown in FIG. 32, similarly to the control map shown in FIG. 12, in front of the reference position P O, than the rear reference position P O, the weight wt is remained at a high value. Therefore, even in this case, when the position of the light source and the reference position PO are made to correspond to each other, the adjacent vehicle existing behind the headlight (light source) is effectively prevented while erroneously detecting adjacent vehicles around the headlight. The tire wheel in the lane can be detected appropriately, and as a result, the adjacent vehicle traveling in the adjacent lane can be detected appropriately.
 また、上述した第1実施形態においては、鳥瞰視画像PB,PBt-1の画素値の差を絶対値化し、当該絶対値が所定の閾値th以上であるときに、差分画像PDの画素値を「1」とし、絶対値が所定の閾値th未満であるときに、差分画像PDの画素値を「0」とする構成を例示したが、この閾値thを、カメラ10と光源との位置関係に応じて変更する構成としてもよい。 In the first embodiment described above, the difference between the pixel values of the bird's-eye view images PB t and PB t−1 is converted into an absolute value, and when the absolute value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold th, the difference image PD t The configuration in which the pixel value is “1” and the pixel value of the difference image PD t is “0” when the absolute value is less than the predetermined threshold th has been exemplified. It is good also as a structure changed according to this positional relationship.
 具体的には、検出基準設定部35は、確信度が所定値未満である場合には、確信度が所定値未満である場合には、たとえば図8左図に示すように、検出領域A1,A2内の領域R1および領域R3において、検出領域A1,A2内の領域R2よりも、閾値thのゲインを大きくし、一方、確信度が所定値以上である場合には、たとえば図13(A)右図に示すように、検出領域A1,A2のうち、光源より前方の領域Rfにおいては、光源より後方の領域Rrよりも、閾値thのゲインを大きくする構成としてもよい。これにより、たとえば、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトが照射された場合に、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトの光が差分波形DWとして検出され難くなり、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトの光を、隣接車両として誤検出してしまうことを有効に防止することができる。 Specifically, when the certainty factor is less than a predetermined value, the detection reference setting unit 35 detects the detection regions A1, 1, for example, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. In the region R1 and the region R3 in A2, the gain of the threshold th is made larger than that in the region R2 in the detection regions A1 and A2. On the other hand, when the certainty factor is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, As shown in the right figure, among the detection areas A1 and A2, in the area Rf in front of the light source, the gain of the threshold th may be larger than in the area Rr behind the light source. Thereby, for example, when the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is irradiated, the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle becomes difficult to be detected as the differential waveform DW t , and the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is used as the adjacent vehicle. It is possible to effectively prevent erroneous detection.
 また、確信度が所定値以上である場合には、たとえば図13(A)右図に示すように、検出領域A1,A2のうち、光源より前方の領域Rfにおいては、光源より後方の領域Rrよりも、閾値thのゲインを大きくする構成としてもよい。これにより、光源より前方の領域Rfにおいて、輝度に対して閾値thが高い値に設定されるため、隣隣接車両V3のヘッドライトの光が差分波形DWとして検出され難くなり、その結果、レンズの汚れや、隣隣接車両V3のヘッドライトの光が道路に反射した反射光などによる、隣接車両の誤検出を有効に防止することができる。なお、この構成に加えて、さらに、検出領域A1,A2内の検出位置における輝度に応じて、閾値thを変更する構成とすることもできる。 When the certainty factor is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, for example, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 13A, in the detection region A1, A2, in the region Rf in front of the light source, the region Rr behind the light source. Alternatively, the gain of the threshold th may be increased. Thereby, in the region Rf in front of the light source, the threshold value th is set to a high value with respect to the luminance, so that it is difficult for the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 to be detected as the differential waveform DW t. Thus, it is possible to effectively prevent erroneous detection of the adjacent vehicle due to, for example, dirt or reflected light obtained by reflecting the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle V3 adjacent to the road. In addition to this configuration, the threshold th may be changed in accordance with the luminance at the detection positions in the detection areas A1 and A2.
 さらに、上述した第1実施形態では、位置合わせ部32により、差分画像PDの画素値を「0」または「1」で検出し、この差分画像PDに基づいて、立体物検出部33により、差分画像PDの画素値が「1」の画素を、差分画素DPとしてカウントすることで、立体物を検出する構成を例示したが、この構成に限定されるものではなく、たとえば、位置合わせ部32により、差分画像PDの画素値を、鳥瞰視画像PB,PBt-1の画素値の差を絶対値化した値で検出し、立体物検出部33により、所定の差分閾値を超える画素を、差分画素DPとしてカウントする構成としてもよい。 Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, the alignment unit 32 detects the pixel value of the difference image PD t as “0” or “1”, and based on the difference image PD t , the three-dimensional object detection unit 33 detects the pixel value. The configuration in which the three-dimensional object is detected by counting the pixels having the pixel value “1” of the difference image PD t as the difference pixel DP is exemplified. However, the configuration is not limited to this configuration. The unit 32 detects the pixel value of the difference image PD t with the absolute value of the difference between the pixel values of the bird's-eye view images PB t and PB t−1 , and the solid object detection unit 33 sets a predetermined difference threshold value. It is good also as a structure which counts the pixel exceeding it as the difference pixel DP.
 また、上述した第1実施形態では、撮像した現時刻の画像と一時刻前の画像とを鳥瞰図に変換し、変換した鳥瞰図の位置合わせを行ったうえで差分画像PDを生成し、生成した差分画像PDを倒れ込み方向(撮像した画像を鳥瞰図に変換した際の立体物の倒れ込み方向)に沿って評価して差分波形DWを生成する構成を例示したが、これに限定されるものではなく、以下のような構成とすることもできる。たとえば、一時刻前の画像のみを鳥瞰図に変換し、変換した鳥瞰図を位置合わせした後に再び撮像した画像相当に変換し、この画像と現時刻の画像とで差分画像PDを生成し、生成した差分画像PDを倒れ込み方向に相当する方向(すなわち、倒れ込み方向を撮像画像上の方向に変換した方向)に沿って評価することによって差分波形DWを生成する構成としてもよい。すなわち、現時刻の画像と一時刻前の画像との位置合わせを行い、位置合わせを行った両画像の差分から差分画像PDを生成し、差分画像PDを鳥瞰図に変換した際の立体物の倒れ込み方向に沿って評価できれば、必ずしも明確に鳥瞰図を生成しなくともよい。 Further, in the first embodiment described above, the captured image at the current time and the image one hour before are converted into a bird's-eye view, and after the alignment of the converted bird's-eye view is performed, the difference image PD t is generated and generated. Although the difference image PD t is evaluated along the falling direction (the falling direction of the three-dimensional object when the captured image is converted into a bird's eye view), the configuration for generating the difference waveform DW t is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the following configuration may be used. For example, only the image one hour before is converted into a bird's-eye view, and the converted bird's-eye view is converted into an equivalent to the image captured again, and a difference image PD t is generated from this image and the image at the current time. collapsing the difference image PD t direction corresponding to the direction (i.e., direction and changing the direction in the direction on the captured image collapse) may be configured to generate a difference waveform DW t by evaluating along. That is, the three-dimensional object when the image of the current time and the image of one hour before are aligned, the difference image PD t is generated from the difference between the two images subjected to the alignment, and the difference image PD t is converted into a bird's eye view The bird's-eye view does not necessarily have to be clearly generated as long as the evaluation can be performed along the direction in which the user falls.
 さらに、上述した第1実施形態では、自車両V1の車速を速度センサ20からの信号に基づいて判断しているが、これに限らず、異なる時刻の複数の画像から速度を推定する構成としてもよい。この場合、車速センサ20が不要となり、構成の簡素化を図ることができる。 Furthermore, in 1st Embodiment mentioned above, although the vehicle speed of the own vehicle V1 is judged based on the signal from the speed sensor 20, it is not restricted to this, As a structure which estimates a speed from the several image at different time. Good. In this case, the vehicle speed sensor 20 is not necessary, and the configuration can be simplified.
 加えて、上述した第1実施形態では、確信度が所定値以上である場合には、隣接車両のタイヤホイールを適切に検出するために、第1の閾値マップから得られる閾値α’、第2の閾値マップから得られる閾値α”を、図12に示す制御マップに規定されている重みwtで重み付けすることで、光源の位置よりも後方において閾値αを低くする構成を例示したが、この構成に加えて、たとえば、カメラ10の中心位置から光源の重心位置までの車幅方向における距離Lを算出し、当該距離Lに応じて、光源に対応する基準閾値Pよりも後方における閾値αを変更する構成としてもよい。たとえば、カメラ10の中心位置から光源の重心までの車幅方向における距離Lが大きいほど、検出した光源は、自車線から遠い隣隣接車線を走行する隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである可能性が高いものと判断して、光源の後方における閾値αを高くする構成としてもよい。これにより、ヘッドライト(光源)の後方においても、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトの光による隣接車両の誤検出を有効に防止することができる。 In addition, in the first embodiment described above, when the certainty factor is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the threshold value α 2 ′ obtained from the first threshold map and the first value are used in order to appropriately detect the tire wheel of the adjacent vehicle. Although the threshold value α 2 ″ obtained from the threshold map of 2 is weighted with the weight wt defined in the control map shown in FIG. 12, the configuration in which the threshold value α is lowered behind the position of the light source is illustrated. In addition to this configuration, for example, a distance L in the vehicle width direction from the center position of the camera 10 to the gravity center position of the light source is calculated, and a threshold value behind the reference threshold value P O corresponding to the light source is calculated according to the distance L. For example, as the distance L in the vehicle width direction from the center position of the camera 10 to the center of gravity of the light source increases, the detected light source travels in an adjacent lane farther from the own lane. The headlight of the adjacent vehicle may be configured to increase the threshold value α at the rear of the light source by determining that the headlight of the adjacent vehicle is highly likely. It is possible to effectively prevent erroneous detection of an adjacent vehicle due to the light.
 また、上述した第2実施形態においては、注目点Paiと参照点Priの輝度差が閾値t以上である場合に、注目点Paiの属性sを「1」または「-1」に設定し、注目点Paiの属性s(xi,yi)と隣接する注目点Pai+1の属性s(xi+1,yi+1)とが所定の閾値θ以上連続して「1」または「-1」である注目線Laを、エッジ線として検出する構成を例示したが、この構成に加えて、この閾値t、閾値θを、検出された光源の位置に応じて変更する構成としてもよい。 In the second embodiment described above, when the luminance difference between the attention point Pai and the reference point Pri is equal to or greater than the threshold value t, the attribute s of the attention point Pai is set to “1” or “−1”, An attention line La in which the attribute s (xi, yi) of the point Pai and the attribute s (xi + 1, yi + 1) of the adjacent attention point Pai + 1 are “1” or “−1” continuously over a predetermined threshold θ Although the configuration for detecting the line is illustrated, in addition to this configuration, the threshold value t and the threshold value θ may be changed according to the position of the detected light source.
 具体的には、検出基準設定部35は、確信度が所定値未満である場合には、たとえば図8左図に示すように、検出領域A1,A2内の領域R1および領域R3において、検出領域A1,A2内の領域R2よりも、閾値t、閾値θのゲインを大きくし、一方、確信度が所定値以上である場合には、たとえば図13(A)右図に示すように、検出領域A1,A2のうち、光源より前方の領域Rfにおいては、光源より後方の領域Rrよりも、閾値t、閾値θのゲインを大きくする構成としてもよい。これにより、検出された光源が隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである場合に、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトの光がエッジ線として検出され難くなり、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトの光の像を隣接車両として誤検出してしまうことを有効に防止することができる。 Specifically, when the certainty factor is less than a predetermined value, the detection reference setting unit 35 detects the detection region in the regions R1 and R3 in the detection regions A1 and A2, for example, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. When the gains of the threshold value t and the threshold value θ are made larger than the area R2 in A1 and A2, and the certainty level is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, for example, as shown in the right figure of FIG. Of A1 and A2, in the region Rf in front of the light source, the gains of the threshold value t and the threshold value θ may be larger than those in the region Rr behind the light source. As a result, when the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle adjacent to the headlight, it is difficult to detect the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle adjacent to the headlight. It is possible to effectively prevent erroneous detection.
 加えて、上述した第2実施形態では、上記数式6,7,8の何れかの式に従って、エッジ線の輝度変化を算出し、エッジ線のうち、輝度変化が所定の閾値tb以上のエッジ線を除外する構成を例示しているが、この構成に加えて、この閾値tbを、検出された光源の位置に応じて変更する構成としてもよい。 In addition, in the second embodiment described above, the luminance change of the edge line is calculated according to any one of the above formulas 6, 7, and 8, and among the edge lines, the edge line whose luminance change is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value tb. However, in addition to this configuration, the threshold value tb may be changed according to the position of the detected light source.
 具体的には、検出基準設定部35は、確信度が所定値未満である場合には、たとえば図8左図に示すように、検出領域A1,A2内の領域R1および領域R3において、検出領域A1,A2内の領域R2よりも、閾値tbのゲインを大きくし、一方、確信度が所定値以上である場合には、たとえば図13(A)右図に示すように、検出領域A1,A2のうち、光源より前方の領域Rfにおいては、光源より後方の領域Rrよりも、閾値tbのゲインを大きくする構成としてもよい。この場合も、検出された光源が隣隣接車両のヘッドライトである場合に、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトの光がエッジ線として検出され難くなり、隣隣接車両のヘッドライトの光の像を隣接車両として誤検出してしまうことを有効に防止することができる。 Specifically, when the certainty factor is less than a predetermined value, the detection reference setting unit 35 detects the detection region in the regions R1 and R3 in the detection regions A1 and A2, for example, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. When the gain of the threshold value tb is made larger than the region R2 in A1 and A2, and the certainty factor is greater than or equal to the predetermined value, for example, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 13A, the detection regions A1 and A2 Among these, in the region Rf in front of the light source, the gain of the threshold value tb may be larger than that in the region Rr behind the light source. Also in this case, when the detected light source is the headlight of the adjacent vehicle, the light of the headlight of the adjacent vehicle becomes difficult to be detected as an edge line, and the headlight light image of the adjacent vehicle is Can be effectively prevented from being erroneously detected.
 なお、上述した実施形態のカメラ10は本発明の撮像手段に相当し、視点変換部31は本発明の画像変換手段に相当し、位置合わせ部32、立体物検出部33,33a、検出基準設定部35,35a、輝度差算出部36、および、エッジ線検出部37は本発明の立体物検出手段に相当し、検出基準設定部35,35aは本発明の光源検出手段に相当する。 The camera 10 of the above-described embodiment corresponds to the imaging unit of the present invention, the viewpoint conversion unit 31 corresponds to the image conversion unit of the present invention, and the alignment unit 32, the three-dimensional object detection units 33 and 33a, and the detection reference setting. The units 35 and 35a, the luminance difference calculation unit 36, and the edge line detection unit 37 correspond to the three-dimensional object detection unit of the present invention, and the detection reference setting units 35 and 35a correspond to the light source detection unit of the present invention.
1,1a…立体物検出装置
10…カメラ
20…車速センサ
30,30a…計算機
31…視点変換部
32…位置合わせ部
33,33a…立体物検出部
34…確信度判定部
35,35a…検出基準設定部
36…輝度差算出部
37…エッジ線検出部
a…画角
A1,A2…検出領域
CP…交点
DP…差分画素
DW,DW’…差分波形
DWt1~DW,DWm+k~DWtn…小領域
L1,L2…接地線
La,Lb…立体物が倒れ込む方向上の線
P…撮像画像
PB…鳥瞰視画像
PD…差分画像
V1…自車両
V2…隣接車両
V3…隣隣接車両
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1, 1a ... Three-dimensional object detection apparatus 10 ... Camera 20 ... Vehicle speed sensor 30, 30a ... Computer 31 ... Viewpoint conversion part 32 ... Position alignment part 33, 33a ... Three-dimensional object detection part 34 ... Certainty determination part 35, 35a ... Detection standard Setting unit 36 ... luminance difference calculation unit 37 ... edge line detection unit a ... view angle A1, A2 ... detection region CP ... intersection DP ... difference pixels DW t , DW t '... difference waveforms DW t1 to DW m , DW m + k to DW tn ... small region L1, L2 ... ground line La, Lb ... line P ... captured image PB t ... bird's-eye view image PD t ... difference image V1 ... vehicle V2 ... adjacent vehicle V3 ... next adjacent vehicle on the direction in which the three-dimensional object collapses

Claims (7)

  1.  自車両後方の隣接車線を基準とする所定領域を撮像する撮像手段と、
     前記撮像手段により得られた撮像画像を鳥瞰視画像に視点変換する画像変換手段と、
     前記画像変換手段により得られた異なる時刻の鳥瞰視画像の位置を鳥瞰視上で位置合わせし、当該位置合わせされた鳥瞰視画像の差分画像上で、所定の第1閾値以上の差分を示す画素数をカウントして度数分布化することで差分波形情報を生成し、当該差分波形情報が所定の第2閾値以上である場合に、前記差分波形情報に基づいて隣接車線に存在する立体物を検出する立体物検出手段と、
     前記撮像手段により得られた撮像画像に基づいて、自車両後方に存在する光源を検出する光源検出手段と、
     前記光源検出手段により前記光源が検出された場合に、前記所定領域のうち前記光源と前記撮像手段とを結ぶ線よりも前方の前方領域において、前記光源と前記撮像手段とを結ぶ線よりも後方の後方領域に対して前記立体物が検出され難いように、前記第1閾値または前記第2閾値を高く設定する制御手段とを備えることを特徴とする立体物検出装置。
    Imaging means for imaging a predetermined area based on an adjacent lane behind the host vehicle;
    Image conversion means for converting the captured image obtained by the imaging means into a bird's eye view image;
    Pixels that align the positions of the bird's-eye view images at different times obtained by the image conversion means on the bird's-eye view, and that show a difference equal to or greater than a predetermined first threshold on the difference image of the aligned bird's-eye view images The differential waveform information is generated by counting the number and performing frequency distribution, and when the differential waveform information is equal to or greater than a predetermined second threshold, the three-dimensional object existing in the adjacent lane is detected based on the differential waveform information Three-dimensional object detection means
    Light source detection means for detecting a light source present behind the host vehicle based on a captured image obtained by the imaging means;
    When the light source is detected by the light source detection means, in the front area ahead of the line connecting the light source and the imaging means in the predetermined area, behind the line connecting the light source and the imaging means And a control unit that sets the first threshold value or the second threshold value high so that the three-dimensional object is difficult to be detected in the rear region of the three-dimensional object detection device.
  2.  請求項1に記載の立体物検出装置であって、
     前記制御手段は、前記光源検出手段により前記光源が検出された場合に、前記所定領域のうち前記前方領域において前記立体物が検出され難いように、前記第1閾値および前記第2閾値を高く設定することを特徴とする立体物検出装置。
    The three-dimensional object detection device according to claim 1,
    The control means sets the first threshold value and the second threshold value high so that when the light source is detected by the light source detection means, it is difficult to detect the three-dimensional object in the front area of the predetermined area. A three-dimensional object detection device.
  3.  自車両後方の隣接車線を含む所定の検出対象領域を撮像する撮像手段と、
     前記撮像手段により得られた画像を鳥瞰視画像に視点変換する画像変換手段と、
     前記画像変換手段により得られた鳥瞰視画像から所定の第1閾値以上のエッジ情報を検出し、前記エッジ情報が所定の第2閾値以上である場合に、前記エッジ情報に基づいて隣接車線に存在する立体物を検出する立体物検出手段と、
     前記撮像手段により得られた画像に基づいて、自車両後方に存在する光源を検出する光源検出手段と、
     前記光源検出手段により前記光源が検出された場合に、前記所定領域のうち前記光源と前記撮像手段とを結ぶ線よりも前方の前方領域において、前記光源と前記撮像手段とを結ぶ線よりも後方の後方領域に対して前記立体物が検出され難いように、前記第1閾値または前記第2閾値を高く設定する制御手段とを備えることを特徴とする立体物検出装置。
    Imaging means for imaging a predetermined detection target area including an adjacent lane behind the host vehicle;
    Image conversion means for converting the image obtained by the imaging means into a bird's eye view image;
    When edge information greater than or equal to a predetermined first threshold is detected from a bird's eye view image obtained by the image conversion means, and the edge information is greater than or equal to a predetermined second threshold, it exists in an adjacent lane based on the edge information A three-dimensional object detecting means for detecting a three-dimensional object to be performed;
    Light source detection means for detecting a light source present behind the host vehicle based on the image obtained by the imaging means;
    When the light source is detected by the light source detection means, in the front area ahead of the line connecting the light source and the imaging means in the predetermined area, behind the line connecting the light source and the imaging means And a control unit that sets the first threshold value or the second threshold value high so that the three-dimensional object is difficult to be detected in the rear region of the three-dimensional object detection device.
  4.  請求項3に記載の立体物検出装置であって、
     前記制御手段は、前記光源検出手段により前記光源が検出された場合に、前記所定領域のうち前記前方領域において前記立体物が検出され難いように、前記第1閾値および前記第2閾値を高く設定することを特徴とする立体物検出装置。
    The three-dimensional object detection device according to claim 3,
    The control means sets the first threshold value and the second threshold value high so that when the light source is detected by the light source detection means, it is difficult to detect the three-dimensional object in the front area of the predetermined area. A three-dimensional object detection device.
  5.  請求項1~4のいずれかに記載の立体物検出装置であって、
     前記制御手段は、前記第1閾値と輝度との関係を示す第1制御マップ、および、前記第1閾値と輝度との関係を示し、前記第1制御マップよりも第1閾値が高く設定されている第2制御マップを有し、前記第1制御マップで得られる第1閾値と、前記第2制御マップで得られる第1閾値とを重み付けすることで、前記立体物を検出する際に用いられる最終的な前記第1閾値を決定し、
     前記制御手段は、前記所定領域のうち前記前方領域においては、前記第1制御マップで得られた第1閾値よりも前記第2制御マップで得られた第1閾値の重みを大きくし、前記所定領域のうち前記後方領域においては、前記第2制御マップで得られた第1閾値よりも前記第1制御マップで得られた第1閾値の重みを大きくすることを特徴とする立体物検出装置。
    The three-dimensional object detection device according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
    The control means indicates a first control map indicating a relationship between the first threshold value and the luminance, and indicates a relationship between the first threshold value and the luminance, and the first threshold value is set higher than the first control map. The second control map is used, and is used when detecting the three-dimensional object by weighting the first threshold obtained by the first control map and the first threshold obtained by the second control map. Determining the final first threshold;
    The control means increases the weight of the first threshold obtained in the second control map in the forward area of the predetermined area, than the first threshold obtained in the first control map. The three-dimensional object detection device characterized in that in the rear region of the region, the weight of the first threshold value obtained with the first control map is larger than the first threshold value obtained with the second control map.
  6.  請求項1~4のいずれかに記載の立体物検出装置であって、
     前記制御手段は、前記第2閾値と輝度との関係を示す第1制御マップ、および、前記第2閾値と輝度との関係を示し、前記第1制御マップよりも第2閾値が高く設定されている第2制御マップを有し、前記第1制御マップで得られる第2閾値と、前記第2制御マップで得られる第2閾値とを重み付けすることで、前記立体物を検出する際に用いられる最終的な前記第2閾値を決定し、
     前記制御手段は、前記所定領域のうち前記前方領域においては、前記第1制御マップで得られた第2閾値よりも前記第2制御マップで得られた第2閾値の重みを大きくし、前記所定領域のうち前記後方領域においては、前記第2制御マップで得られた第2閾値よりも前記第1制御マップで得られた第2閾値の重みを大きくすることを特徴とする立体物検出装置。
    The three-dimensional object detection device according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
    The control means indicates a first control map indicating a relationship between the second threshold and luminance, and indicates a relationship between the second threshold and luminance, and the second threshold is set higher than the first control map. The second control map is used, and is used when detecting the three-dimensional object by weighting the second threshold obtained by the first control map and the second threshold obtained by the second control map. Determining the final second threshold;
    The control means increases the weight of the second threshold value obtained by the second control map in the forward region of the predetermined region, than the second threshold value obtained by the first control map, and The three-dimensional object detection device characterized in that, in the rear region of the region, the weight of the second threshold value obtained by the first control map is made larger than the second threshold value obtained by the second control map.
  7.  自車両後方の隣接車線を基準とする所定領域を撮像する撮像手段と、
     前記撮像手段により得られた撮像画像を鳥瞰視画像に視点変換する画像変換手段と、
     前記画像変換手段により得られた前記鳥瞰視画像上で、前記鳥瞰視画像に視点変換した際に立体物が倒れこむ方向において、輝度差が所定の第1閾値以上の画素の分布情報を検出し、前記立体物が倒れこむ方向における前記画素の分布の度合いが所定の第2閾値以上である場合に、前記画素の分布情報に基づいて、前記立体物の検出を行う立体物検出手段と、
     前記撮像手段により得られた撮像画像に基づいて、自車両後方に存在する光源を検出する光源検出手段と、
     前記光源検出手段により前記光源が検出された場合に、前記所定領域のうち前記光源と前記撮像手段とを結ぶ線よりも前方の前方領域において、前記光源と前記撮像手段とを結ぶ線よりも後方の後方領域に対して前記立体物が検出され難いように、前記第1閾値または前記第2閾値を高く設定する制御手段とを備えることを特徴とする立体物検出装置。
    Imaging means for imaging a predetermined area based on an adjacent lane behind the host vehicle;
    Image conversion means for converting the captured image obtained by the imaging means into a bird's eye view image;
    On the bird's-eye view image obtained by the image conversion means, pixel distribution information having a luminance difference equal to or greater than a predetermined first threshold is detected in a direction in which the three-dimensional object collapses when the viewpoint is converted into the bird's-eye view image. Three-dimensional object detection means for detecting the three-dimensional object based on the distribution information of the pixel when the degree of distribution of the pixel in a direction in which the three-dimensional object falls is equal to or greater than a predetermined second threshold;
    A light source detection means for detecting a light source existing behind the host vehicle based on a captured image obtained by the imaging means;
    When the light source is detected by the light source detection means, in the front area ahead of the line connecting the light source and the imaging means in the predetermined area, behind the line connecting the light source and the imaging means And a control unit that sets the first threshold value or the second threshold value high so that the three-dimensional object is difficult to be detected in the rear region of the three-dimensional object detection device.
PCT/JP2013/054853 2012-03-01 2013-02-26 Three-dimensional object detection device WO2013129352A1 (en)

Priority Applications (7)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
RU2014139679A RU2633120C2 (en) 2012-03-01 2013-02-26 Device for detecting three-dimensional objects
CN201380009569.8A CN104115204B (en) 2012-03-01 2013-02-26 Stereoscopic article detection device
JP2014502222A JP5743020B2 (en) 2012-03-01 2013-02-26 Three-dimensional object detection device
BR112014020406-3A BR112014020406B1 (en) 2012-03-01 2013-02-26 THREE-DIMENSIONAL OBJECT DETECTION DEVICE
MX2014009700A MX344875B (en) 2012-03-01 2013-02-26 Three-dimensional object detection device.
EP13754531.5A EP2821981A4 (en) 2012-03-01 2013-02-26 Three-dimensional object detection device
US14/373,049 US9830519B2 (en) 2012-03-01 2013-02-26 Three-dimensional object detection device

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2012-045349 2012-03-01
JP2012045349 2012-03-01

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2013129352A1 true WO2013129352A1 (en) 2013-09-06

Family

ID=49082549

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2013/054853 WO2013129352A1 (en) 2012-03-01 2013-02-26 Three-dimensional object detection device

Country Status (9)

Country Link
US (1) US9830519B2 (en)
EP (1) EP2821981A4 (en)
JP (1) JP5743020B2 (en)
CN (1) CN104115204B (en)
BR (1) BR112014020406B1 (en)
MX (1) MX344875B (en)
MY (1) MY173364A (en)
RU (1) RU2633120C2 (en)
WO (1) WO2013129352A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11314971B2 (en) 2017-09-27 2022-04-26 3M Innovative Properties Company Personal protective equipment management system using optical patterns for equipment and safety monitoring
US11373076B2 (en) 2017-02-20 2022-06-28 3M Innovative Properties Company Optical articles and systems interacting with the same

Families Citing this family (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20160300372A1 (en) * 2015-04-09 2016-10-13 Bendix Commercial Vehicle Systems Llc System and Method for Graphically Indicating an Object in an Image
US20180220081A1 (en) * 2017-01-30 2018-08-02 GM Global Technology Operations LLC Method and apparatus for augmenting rearview display
JP7079123B2 (en) * 2018-03-15 2022-06-01 キヤノン株式会社 Imaging device and its control method, imaging system
US10816979B2 (en) * 2018-08-24 2020-10-27 Baidu Usa Llc Image data acquisition logic of an autonomous driving vehicle for capturing image data using cameras
JP7034231B1 (en) * 2020-10-20 2022-03-11 三菱電機株式会社 Vehicle position detection device and vehicle position detection method
US11546734B2 (en) * 2021-05-17 2023-01-03 Ford Global Technologies, Llc Providing security via vehicle-based surveillance of neighboring vehicles

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000285245A (en) * 1999-03-31 2000-10-13 Toshiba Corp Method and device for preventing collision of moving body and recording medium
JP2003312408A (en) * 2002-04-17 2003-11-06 Toshiba Corp Image diagnosing device, image diagnosing system of on- vehicle image monitoring device and passing vehicle monitoring device
JP2008158958A (en) * 2006-12-26 2008-07-10 Nissan Motor Co Ltd Road surface determination method and road surface determination device
JP2008219063A (en) 2007-02-28 2008-09-18 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Apparatus and method for monitoring vehicle's surrounding
JP2008227646A (en) 2007-03-09 2008-09-25 Clarion Co Ltd Obstacle detector
JP2009265783A (en) * 2008-04-23 2009-11-12 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Driving supporting system and vehicle

Family Cites Families (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6411204B1 (en) * 1999-11-15 2002-06-25 Donnelly Corporation Deceleration based anti-collision safety light control for vehicle
JP2007235642A (en) * 2006-03-02 2007-09-13 Hitachi Ltd Obstruction detecting system
JP4893945B2 (en) * 2007-02-06 2012-03-07 株式会社デンソー Vehicle periphery monitoring device
RU2533645C2 (en) * 2010-05-27 2014-11-20 Сергей Анатольевич Королев Intelligent transport system and method for use thereof
JP5251927B2 (en) 2010-06-21 2013-07-31 日産自動車株式会社 Moving distance detection device and moving distance detection method
JP5809785B2 (en) * 2010-07-30 2015-11-11 日立オートモティブシステムズ株式会社 Vehicle external recognition device and light distribution control system using the same
MY160274A (en) * 2010-08-19 2017-02-28 Nissan Motor Three-dimensional object detection device and three-dimensional object detection method

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000285245A (en) * 1999-03-31 2000-10-13 Toshiba Corp Method and device for preventing collision of moving body and recording medium
JP2003312408A (en) * 2002-04-17 2003-11-06 Toshiba Corp Image diagnosing device, image diagnosing system of on- vehicle image monitoring device and passing vehicle monitoring device
JP2008158958A (en) * 2006-12-26 2008-07-10 Nissan Motor Co Ltd Road surface determination method and road surface determination device
JP2008219063A (en) 2007-02-28 2008-09-18 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Apparatus and method for monitoring vehicle's surrounding
JP2008227646A (en) 2007-03-09 2008-09-25 Clarion Co Ltd Obstacle detector
JP2009265783A (en) * 2008-04-23 2009-11-12 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Driving supporting system and vehicle

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11373076B2 (en) 2017-02-20 2022-06-28 3M Innovative Properties Company Optical articles and systems interacting with the same
US11651179B2 (en) 2017-02-20 2023-05-16 3M Innovative Properties Company Optical articles and systems interacting with the same
US11314971B2 (en) 2017-09-27 2022-04-26 3M Innovative Properties Company Personal protective equipment management system using optical patterns for equipment and safety monitoring
US11682185B2 (en) 2017-09-27 2023-06-20 3M Innovative Properties Company Personal protective equipment management system using optical patterns for equipment and safety monitoring

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
BR112014020406B1 (en) 2021-08-31
RU2633120C2 (en) 2017-10-11
MY173364A (en) 2020-01-21
US9830519B2 (en) 2017-11-28
US20150002671A1 (en) 2015-01-01
EP2821981A4 (en) 2015-05-20
CN104115204A (en) 2014-10-22
BR112014020406A2 (en) 2021-05-25
CN104115204B (en) 2016-08-24
MX2014009700A (en) 2014-09-12
JPWO2013129352A1 (en) 2015-07-30
RU2014139679A (en) 2016-04-20
JP5743020B2 (en) 2015-07-01
EP2821981A1 (en) 2015-01-07
MX344875B (en) 2017-01-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5804180B2 (en) Three-dimensional object detection device
JP5743020B2 (en) Three-dimensional object detection device
JP5787024B2 (en) Three-dimensional object detection device
JP5981550B2 (en) Three-dimensional object detection apparatus and three-dimensional object detection method
JP5776795B2 (en) Three-dimensional object detection device
JP5682735B2 (en) Three-dimensional object detection device
WO2014017624A1 (en) Three-dimensional object detection device, and three-dimensional object detection method
JP5943077B2 (en) Three-dimensional object detection apparatus and three-dimensional object detection method
JP5874831B2 (en) Three-dimensional object detection device
WO2013125403A1 (en) Three-dimensional object detection device
JP5783319B2 (en) Three-dimensional object detection apparatus and three-dimensional object detection method
JP5835459B2 (en) Three-dimensional object detection device
JP5790867B2 (en) Three-dimensional object detection device
JP5999183B2 (en) Three-dimensional object detection apparatus and three-dimensional object detection method
JP5768927B2 (en) Three-dimensional object detection device
JP5668891B2 (en) Three-dimensional object detection device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 13754531

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2014502222

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

REEP Request for entry into the european phase

Ref document number: 2013754531

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2013754531

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 14373049

Country of ref document: US

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: MX/A/2014/009700

Country of ref document: MX

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: IDP00201404825

Country of ref document: ID

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2014139679

Country of ref document: RU

Kind code of ref document: A

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: BR

Ref legal event code: B01A

Ref document number: 112014020406

Country of ref document: BR

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 112014020406

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20140819

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: BR

Ref legal event code: B01E

Ref document number: 112014020406

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A8

Free format text: APRESENTE A TRADUCAO SIMPLES DA FOLHA DE ROSTO DA CERTIDAO DE DEPOSITO DA PRIORIDADE REIVINDICADA; OU DECLARACAO DE QUE OS DADOS DO PEDIDO INTERNACIONAL ESTAO FIELMENTE CONTIDOS NA PRIORIDADE REIVINDICADA, CONTENDO TODOS OS DADOS IDENTIFICADORES (NUMERO DA PRIORIDADE, DATA, DEPOSITANTE E INVENTORES), CONFORME O PARAGRAFO UNICO DO ART. 25 DA RESOLUCAO 77/2013. CABE SALIENTAR NAO FOI POSSIVEL INDIVIDUALIZAR OS TITULARES DA CITADA PRIORIDADE, INFORMACAO NECESSARIA PARA O EXAME DA CESSAO DO DOCUMENTO DE PRIORIDADE, SE FOR O CASO.

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 112014020406

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20140819